PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
Areas Covered
This section explains the notes for your safety and conventions used in this manual.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
This chapter explains component names and basic operations of this server, as well as an
overview of the software provided with this server. In addition, the workflow, from placing the
server to starting the operation, is also described.
This chapter explains the preparation on the server and cautions necessary before OS installation.
Please read this chapter before starting installation.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
This chapter explains how to install the OS in the server using ServerStart.
This chapter explains how to install the OS without using ServerStart.
This chapter explains the operations to perform after OS installation. Be sure to perform those
operations before operating the server.
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Appendix
For stable PRIMERGY server operations, we recommend that high reliability tools be installed.
This chapter explains the installation and necessary settings of high reliability tools.
This chapter explains how to install and remove the various hardware options.
This chapter explains how to make the environment settings necessary to operate the server and
how to use each utility.
This chapter explains the operations necessary after starting to use this server as well as daily
care and maintenance.
This appendix explains the specifications for the server and for its hardware options.
1
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
Remarks
■ Warning Descriptions
Various symbols are used throughout this manual. These are used to emphasize important points for your
safety and that of others. The following are the symbols and their meanings.
Ignoring this symbol could be potentiality lethal.
Ignoring this symbol may lead to physical injury and/or damage the server or hardware options.
The following symbols are used to indicate the type of warning or caution being described.
The triangle mark emphasizes the urgency of the WARNING and CAUTION. Details are
detailed inside the triangle and above it.
A barred circle ( ) warns against certain actions (Do Not). These actions are detailed inside
the circle and above it.
A black circle indicates actions that must be taken. These actions are detailed inside the black
circle and above it.
■ Symbols
Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings.
These sections explain prohibited actions and points to note when using this device. Make
sure to read these sections.
These sections explain information needed to operate the hardware and software properly.
Make sure to read these sections.
This mark indicates reference pages or manuals.
→
■ Key Descriptions / Operations
Keys are represented throughout this manual in the following manner.
E.g.: [Ctrl] key, [Enter] key, [→] key, etc.
The following indicate pressing several keys at once:
E.g.: [Ctrl] + [F3] key, [Shift] + [↑] key, etc.
■ Entering Commands (Keys)
Command entries are displayed in the following way.
•
•
•
In the areas of the "↑" mark, press the [Space] key once.
When using Windows or DOS OS, commands are not case sensitive.
CD-ROM drive names are shown as [CD-ROM drive]. Enter your drive name according to your
environment.
[CD-ROM drive]:\setup.exe
3
■ Screen Shots and Figures
Screen shots and figures are used as visual aids throughout this manual. Windows, screens, and file
names may vary depending on the OS, software, or configuration of the server used. Figures in this
manual may not show cables that are actually connected for convenience of explanation.
■ Consecutive Operations
Consecutive operations are described by connecting them with arrows (→).
Example: Procedure of clicking the [Start] button, pointing to [Programs], and clicking [Accessories]
↓
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories].
■ Server Types
Server types are described as follows.
table: Server Types
Expressions and
abbreviations
Type
Servers without an internal hard disk
Servers with an internal hard disk
Stationary servers
Diskless type
SCSI Type
Pedestal type
Rack mount type
Rack mount servers using a Rack Conversion kit
■ Product Names
The following expressions and abbreviations are used throughout this manual.
table: Abbreviations of Product Names
Product name
PRIMERGY TX200 S2
Expressions and abbreviations
This server or the server
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003, Standard
Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition or Windows
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003, Enterprise
Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition
or Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Windows 2000 Advanced Server or
Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation
Environment
Windows PE
Microsoft® Windows® Server Network Operating
System Version 4.0
Windows NT Server 4.0
and Microsoft® Windows NT® Server, Enterprise
Edition 4.0
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows NT
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation Operating
System 4.0
4
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Abbreviations of Product Names
Expressions and abbreviations
Product name
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Service Pack
Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES (v2.1 for x86)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (v2.1 for x86)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES (v3 for x86)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (v3 for x86)
Service Pack
Linux
Reference Information
■ Software Manuals
Software Manual contains other reference information and cautions for ServerStart not described in this
manual. Please read it before using ServerStart.
Software Manual is contained as a "README.TXT" file in the root directory on the ServerStart CD-
ROM. Use a text editor to read it.
■ Latest Information about Software Provided with This Server
For the latest information regarding ServerStart and other software provided with this server, refer to the
Warning and Caution Labels
Warning and caution labels are found on the server.
Do not remove or stain these labels.
5
6
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Server Setup Checksheet
Contents
1.1 TX200 S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.1 Setup Support Tool - ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.2.2 High Reliability Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
1.2.3 Installing High Reliability Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
1.3.1 Server (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
1.3.2 Server (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
1.3.3 Server (Internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
1.3.4 Baseboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
1.4.1 Sliding the Drive Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
1.4.2 Opening the Rack Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
1.4.3 Turning On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
1.4.4 Turning Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
1.4.5 Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
1.4.6 Inserting and Ejecting a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
1.5 Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.1.2 Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
2.3.1 Installation Partition Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
2.3.2 Notes on Configuring RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
2.3.4 Cautions for Using ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
2.4.1 Installing ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
2.4.2 Uninstalling ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
7
3.1 Guided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.1.1 Starting Up the Guided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.1.2 Open/create a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.1.3 RAID Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.1.4 Disk Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.1.7 Close/save the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1 Starting Up the Preconfiguration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.3 Close/save the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.4 Starting OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.3 Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.3.1 Starting Up the Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.4.1 Overview of Remote Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.5 Installation on Multiple (the Second and Subsequent) Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.5.3 Installation in Preconfiguration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.1.1 Required Driver Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.2.1 Installing Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.2.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Server Setup Checksheet
4.3.3 Latest Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
5.2.1 Creating the Automated System Recovery (ASR) Set
For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
5.3.1 How to Store the BIOS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
5.4.1 Creating a DOS Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
5.5.1 Updating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5.5.5 Turning the Power On via a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
5.5.6 Other Notes on Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
5.6.1 BACS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
5.6.2 VLAN Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
5.7.1 Intel® PROSet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
5.7.4 Teaming Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
5.7.5 VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
5.7.6 Local Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
9
7.2.1 Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.3.1 Where to Install CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.3.3 How to Install a CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.4.1 Where to Install the Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.4.3 How to Install Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.5.1 Where to Install an Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.5.3 How to Install an Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.6.3 How to Install the Internal Hard Disk Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.7.1 Where to Install 5-inch Internal Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
7.8.1 How to Install a Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
7.9.2 Connecting External SCSI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.1.1 Switch Location and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Server Setup Checksheet
8.2.2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
8.2.3 IDE Drive Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
8.2.4 Boot Options Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
8.2.5 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
8.2.7 PCI Configuration Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
8.2.10 IPMI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
8.2.13 Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
8.3.2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
8.3.3 Boot Adapter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
8.3.4 Global Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
8.3.5 Adapter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
8.3.6 Formatting Hard Disks Physically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
9.1.1 Checking the Server Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
9.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
9.2.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
9.2.3 Software Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
9.3.2 Viewing the System Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
9.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
9.4.1 Hardware Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
9.5 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
9.5.1 Importance of Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
9.6.1 For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
9.6.2 For a Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
9.7.1 Checking before OS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
11
9.7.2 Reinstallation Using ServerStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
9.8.2 For a Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
A.1 Diskless Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
A.2 SCSI Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B.1 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.2 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B.3 Internal Hard Disk Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B.5 Power Cord Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
C.2 Connecting the Server to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
C.4 Remote Power Supply Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
12
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 TX200 S2
This server has the following features.
■ High Reliability
● Advanced Memory Protection Functions
The server supports the Chipkill function using PC2700-compliant memory (DDR 333 SDRAM)
(256MB DIMM is not supported) and spare memory function to enable data recovery in the event of a
memory error.
● Storage System Configuration
A storage system (RAID0/1/5/10) can be configured using an optional RAID card.
A failed hard disk unit in a storage system can be replaced or repaired without turning off the server and
peripheral devices (a hot-plug is supported in configurations other than RAID0).
● Redundant Function
The power supply units and system fans can enable the redundant function using the PowerSupply
Conversion kit. If one power supply unit or system fan fails, it can be replaced without stopping the
system.
● Hardware and Software Designed for Data Security
Locks on the drive covers and the password setting in the BIOS Setup Utility protect hardware and data
assets in the server against theft, ensuring data security.
● Proactive Fan Function
When a fan fails or the ambient temperature rises, the system fan speed is increased automatically to
avoid increase in temperature in the server, ensuring stable server operation.
● High Reliability Tools
High reliability tools offer stable system operation. For information about high reliability tools, refer to
■ High-speed Processing
®
● 64-bit Intel Xeon™ Processors
®
™
The server can have up to two 64-bit Intel Xeon processors for high-speed data processing (one
processor in standard servers). The server supports the Hyper-Threading function that uses one physical
CPU as two logical CPUs, providing high-efficiency and high-speed processing.
14
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● PCI-X
The server uses PCI-X buses with a maximum data transfer speed of 1066MB/sec.
● Ultra320 SCSI
1
The Ultra320 SCSI interface, which provides a maximum data transfer speed of 320MB/sec, is
supported, ensuring high-speed data transfer during disk access.
■ Excellent Scalability
● Maximum Memory Size of 6GB
In addition to the preinstalled 512MB memory, the system has three memory banks for supporting up to
6GB memory.
● Maximum Hard Disk Size of 2700GB
Up to six internal hard disk units can be installed in the 3.5-inch storage bays. When the internal hard
disk unit bay conversion kit is used, three hard disk units can be added in the 5-inch storage bays. Thus,
the server can have up to nine hard disk units. The hard disk size can be increased up to 2700GB.
● Five PCI Slots
The server has five PCI slots, including 64-bit, 133MHz PCI-X slots. Functions can be added by using
expansion cards.
● Three 5-inch Internal Option Bays
The server has three 5-inch storage bays to accommodate up to two 5-inch internal options for an
increasing amount of data (one bay is used for the standard CD-ROM drive unit).
● Rack Mount Type
With the Rack Conversion kit for TX200S2, the server can be installed on a rack.
15
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 Supplied Software
ServerStart for supporting setup and high reliability tools for avoiding problems during
server operation are supplied with this server.
1.2.1 Setup Support Tool - ServerStart
ServerStart is a setup support tool that helps to install PRIMERGY.
It offers easy server installation and proper installation of recommended drivers.
■ Installing ServerStart
Installing ServerStart
Not using Server Start
User definition, access privileges, network settings
It is necessary to input successively for installation,
resulting in more mistakes and longer time
Install
&
Setup
Example:
Operations such as setting IP address,
creating users, and registering computer
name are required
Using ServerStart
Auto installation of recommended drivers (SCSI, LAN,
etc.) enables high reliable installation
High reliability tool can be installed
automatically *1
Auto setup
Example:
Operations during OS installation is automated *2
*1 High reliability tool is a software with comprehensive strength for stable
system operation of the server management
*2 Some input (License window, etc.) and media repositioning are excluded
16
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Configuration File (SerStartBatch.ini)
A configuration file stores the server setup information configured in ServerStart. To create a
configuration file, use the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with this server. Store only one file on each
floppy disk. Do not set the ServerStart floppy disk to the write-protected state.
You can use any name for the configuration file. However, the file must be installed in the server as
"SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the configuration file, make sure to save it as "SerStartBatch.ini" on
the ServerStart floppy disk.
1
Start up ServerStart, insert the ServerStart floppy disk containing "SerStartBatch.ini", and click [Start] to
install the server.
■ Intuitive User Interface
The intuitive user interface allows you to easily set the necessary information.
● Main Window
When ServerStart is started, the following window appears. The window and tool bar differ depending
on the mode.
17
Chapter 1 Overview
● Tool Bar
In Guide/Expert Mode
Brings you to
the next page.
Brings you to
the previous page.
Changes the size
of icons.
Ends ServerStart.
Brings you to
the main screen.
Brings you up
one tier.
Resets the status
function.
ON/OFF of the tree display is set.
It doesn't support, and never click.
ꢀ
While the wizard is running, do not click the
icon to move to the previous or next window or
to a different tree level. To move to a different window, click the [Previous], [Up], or [Next] button at the
bottom of the wizard window.
● Wizard Window
Clicking a wizard displays a wizard window.
Set items in the wizard window. To move to a step in the next wizard window, click the operation button
at the bottom of the window. Clicking the [help] button displays a tip for setting the item.
18
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Network Configuration
ServerStart can configure a network at server installation.
For details on available network patterns, refer to "Using ServerStart to Configure the Network".
■ Automatic Driver Installation
1
Recommended drivers for automatically recognized expansion cards are installed with the server. This
prevents possible mistakes in driver installation, such as installation of an older version or drivers which
were not supplied with this server.
■ Automatic RAID Configuration
When an array controller card is used, specify the RAID type and the number of hard disk units before
starting installation. A storage system can be configured without starting the RAID utility.
■ Remote Installation
ServerStart can be store resources necessary for installation, such as the OS and Service Pack, in a
different server on the network and install the OS via the network. This method is used when the server
does not have a CD-ROM or floppy disk drive.
SystemcastWizard Professional (optional) is a useful tool for extracting a lot of files in a short time.
1.2.2 High Reliability Tools
High reliability tools are a comprehensively useful set of software for stable system operations of the
server. The following tools have respective roles to manage normal operations or recovery from errors:
•
•
•
Server monitoring tools
System diagnosis support tools
LAN driver detailed setting tools
■ Server Monitoring Tools
The server monitoring tools monitor the hardware status on behalf of the administrator and notify him/
her in the event of an error.
● Detecting a Server Failure Early [ServerView]
ServerView is software that monitors whether the server hardware is in a normal state to protect
important server resources. When using ServerView, the server hardware is monitored all the time. If an
error that could cause trouble is detected, the administrator is notified in real-time. This allows the server
administrator to remove a system error early and avoid trouble.
● Array Configuration / Disk Management [RAID Management Tool]
RAID Management Tool is software that perform array configurations, disk initialization and storage
system monitoring. When an event occurs, it leaves an event log in the event viewer's application logs.
At the same time, a pop-up window indicates a hard disk failure, rebuild status, etc.
19
Chapter 1 Overview
■ System Diagnosis Support Tools
The system diagnosis support tools are for supporting system diagnosis during normal operation or in
the event of trouble.
● Solving Problems Early [DSNAP]
DSNAP is a command line utility for collectively acquiring failure investigation information. It makes
easy to collect system file configuration information, setting major registries, and command line
operation of the event log. When a problem occurs in your Windows Server 2003 / Windows 2000
Server system, DSNAP is used for a maintenance engineer to understand your system software
configuration and settings correctly and to promote research smoothly. Provide this with memory dump
to your maintenance engineer.
■ LAN Driver Detailed Setting Tools
These tools set details on the LAN, including the use of the Teaming (load balance) function and VLAN
configuration.
®
● Intel PROSet
®
Intel PROSet is a tool for setting details on the LAN card when it is used with another LAN card or the
onboard LAN for using the Teaming function or when it is used for configuring a VLAN.
● Broadcom Advanced Control Suite (BACS)
BACS is a tool for setting details on the onboard LAN when it is used to configure a VLAN.
20
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.2.3 Installing High Reliability Tools
You can install all high reliability tools provided with PRIMERGY by specifying them in "Application
Wizard" when the OS is installed with ServerStart.
After manual OS installation, high reliability tools can be installed all at once, just as they are installed
during OS installation with ServerStart.
1
In each case, the following high reliability tools are installed.
table: Installation of high reliability tools
High reliability tool
RAID Management Tool
Batch installation
Α* 1
S
ServerView
DSNAP
S
Α*2
Intel® PROSet
Broadcom Advanced Control Suite (BACS)
A
A: Installed in any case
S: Installed if selected
*1: Will not be installed when a RAID controller is not installed
*2: Will not be installed when a LAN card (PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1882/PG-1892) is not installed
ꢀ
Linux does not support batch installation with ServerStart.
ꢀ
ServerView must be configured after installation even when the high reliability tools have been
RAID Management Tool requires that ServerView have been installed. Be sure to install ServerView.
ꢀ
21
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3 Component Names and Functions
This section explains the component names and functions of the server and
baseboard.
1.3.1 Server (Front View)
a
b c d e f g h
r
i
j
Drive cover
k
l
m
n
o
p
Pull the drive cover
down to the lower
end of the server.
q
a Drive cover key
When the drive cover key is locked, the drive cover cannot be slid. We recommend you lock it to
prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the server.
b System identification LED
This LED is used for maintenance. When pressing the system identification LED button, the
front and rear LEDs are lit blue so that the locations of devices being maintained can be
determined.
Also, the [System Identification LED Display] button of ServerView can be used to light them.
c System identification LED button
When pressing this button, the front and rear system identification LEDs are lit blue so that the
locations of devices being maintained can be determined.
d Reset switch
Pressing this switch resets and restarts the system.
ꢀ
Do not restart the system when the hard disk access LED is blinking.
Data in the hard disk may be damaged.
22
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
e Maintenance switch
This switch is used only by maintenance personnel. Do not touch this.
f System status LED (
)
This LED lights or blinks in amber when an error is detected in the server components. If this
LED lights or blinks, contact your maintenance engineer or device administrator.
1
g Hard disk access LED (
)
This LED blinks when data is being written to or read from the hard disk.
However, this LED does not light when an array system is configured using a RAID Ctrl 2-
Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3). Check the hard disk access display LED of each internal
hard disk for the access status.
h Power LED (
)
This LED is lit green when the server is turned on.
This is lit amber when the server is not turned on (standby mode).
This does not light when the power cable is unplugged from the outlet.
i Power switch
Press this switch to turn the server on.
ꢀ
Do not turn the server off when the hard disk access LED is blinking.
Data in the hard disk may be damaged.
j 5-inch storage bay
Contains a 5-inch internal device.
k CD-ROM drive
Reads data or programs from a CD-ROM.
l CD-ROM eject button
Press this button to eject a CD-ROM.
Do not press this when the CD-ROM access LED is on.
m CD-ROM access LED
This LED blinks when data is being read from a CD-ROM.
n Floppy disk drive
Writes/reads data to/from a floppy disk.
o Floppy disk eject button
Press this button to eject a floppy disk.
Do not press this when the floppy disk access LED is on.
p Floppy disk access LED
This LED blinks when data is being written to or read from a floppy disk.
q Drive cover
This slides up and down.
r USB port (
)
Connects peripheral equipment conforming to the USB standard (2.0 or 1.1).
23
Chapter 1 Overview
■ Inside the Hard Disk Cover
Hard disk cover
Remove the hard disk cover.
a
b
c
a 3.5-inch storage bay
Contains an internal hard disk.
b Hard disk access display LED (
)
This LED is lit green when data is being written to or read from the hard disk.
table: Meaning of the Hard Disk Access Display LED
LED status
Hard disk access status
Hard disk is not accessed
Off
Lights in green
Hard disk is accessed
c Hard disk failure LED (
)
During an array system configuration, this LED is lit amber when an error is detected in the
internal hard disk unit.
It is lit or blinks depending on the hard disk status as follows.
table: Meaning of the Hard Disk Failure LED
LED status
Hard disk status
In normal mode or hot spare mode
Off
Lights in amber
Blinks in amber
Error detected in the hard disk (in an array configuration)
Rebuilding or faulty hard disk replacement in progress
24
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.3.2 Server (Rear View)
Power supply unit
(non redundant)
a
b
c
d
1
Power supply unit
(redundant)
a
c
e
g
i
h
o
j
f
k
l
m
n
a Power supply unit
When Power Supply Conversion kit is used, two power supply units are installed to enable the
redundant power function.
b Outlet (on the standard power supply only)
This cannot be used. Do not connect a power cable of peripheral devices.
c Inlet
Power cables are plugged in.
d Main switch (on the standard power supply only)
Turn this switch to "1" to turn on the main power of the server.
Once the main power is turned on, you do not have to turn this switch every time you start up the
server.
e Power status LED (on the redundant power supply only)
This LED is on, depending on the power supply status as follows.
table: Meaning of the Power Status LED
LED status
Lights in green
Lights in amber
Off
Power supply unit status
In normal mode (operating)
In normal mode (standby)
Power not supplied (power off)
25
Chapter 1 Overview
f Power supply unit status LED (on the redundant power supply only)
This LED is on, depending on the power supply unit status as follows.
table: Meaning of the Power Supply Unit Status LED
LED status
Lights in red
Off
Power supply unit status
Failure detected
Power off or normal power supply
g System status LED / System identification LED
This LED lights or blinks in amber when an error is detected in the server components. If this
LED lights or blinks, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer or device administrator.
ꢀ
This LED is lit when the server is in standby mode (when the AC power is on and the DC power
is off), but this does not indicate an error.
When pressing the system identification LED button located on the front of the server, the front
and rear LEDs are lit blue so that the locations of devices being maintained can be determined.
Also, the [System Identification LED Display] button of ServerView can be used to light them.
h Keyboard port (
)
A keyboard is plugged in.
i Mouse port (
)
A mouse is plugged in.
j Serial port (
)
Cables of peripheral equipment conforming to the RS-232C standard such as modems are
plugged in.
The left port is Serial Port 1, and the right port is Serial Port 2.
Serial Port 1 (left) can be used for server management when the setting is changed with the BIOS
Setup Utility. For how to use the server management port, refer to "Appendix C Using the Server
Management Port" (ꢁpg.306).
k USB port (
)
Connects peripheral equipment conforming to the USB standard (2.0 or 1.1).
l Display port (
)
A display cable is plugged in.
m Parallel port ( ) (optional)
A printer cable is plugged using the optional parallel port expansion kit.
26
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
n LAN (10/100/1000BASE-T) port (
)
An Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is plugged in.
For 1000Mbps connection, a category 5 enhanced cable is required.
For 10Mbps/100Mbps connection, a category 5 or higher cable is required.
1
LED
The meaning of the LED is shown in the table below.
table: Meaning of the LAN Port LED
LED
location
LED status
Connection status
Upper LED
Lights in amber
Connection established at
1000Mbps
Lights in green
Connection established at
100Mbps
Off
Connection established at 10Mbps
Link is being established
Lower LED
Lights in green
Blinks in green
Data is being transferred
o Side cover lock
When the side cover is locked, it cannot be opened. We recommend you lock it to prevent
unauthorized access to the inside of the server.
27
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.3 Server (Internal)
a
b
i
h
c
g
Rear
Front
f
e
d
a Power supply unit
b 5-inch storage bay
Contains a 5-inch internal optional device.
c 3.5-inch storage bay
Contains an internal hard disk.
d System fan
Two fans are installed by default. When Power Supply Conversion kit is used, four fans are
installed to enable the redundant function.
e CPU fan
One fan is installed by default. If a CPU is added, a CPU fan is also added.
f CPU socket
Install the CPU. One socket is installed by default. Up to two sockets can be installed.
g PCI slot
Contains extension cards that enhance the server functions.
PCI cards with the PCI bus interface can be installed in the PCI slots.
h Memory slot
Contains memory.
i Ventilation system cover
28
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.3.4 Baseboard
a
b
c
d
1
e
f
g
l
k
j
i
h
a Parallel port
A parallel port cable is plugged in when an optional parallel port is used.
b Memory slot
Contains memory. One memory bank consists of Slots A and B in this server. Be sure to install a
pair of memory modules.
c Switch block
d CPU Socket 0/CPU Socket 1
Install the CPU. The upper is CPU Socket 0 and the lower is CPU Socket 1 in the above figure.
e Secondary IDE port
An IDE cable of the CD-ROM drive is plugged in.
f Floppy disk drive port
A floppy disk drive cable is plugged in.
g Primary IDE port
This server does not use this port.
h SCSI port A
An internal hard disk unit is plugged in.
i SCSI port B
An internal hard disk unit or a 5-inch internal SCSI device is plugged in.
29
Chapter 1 Overview
j Internal power port
An RSB power cable is plugged in when a remote service board is installed.
k Server control port
A server control cable is plugged in when a remote service board is installed.
l PCI slot
Contains an expansion card. PCI slots (1 to 5) are numbered from bottom to top in the above
figure.
30
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.4 Standard Operations
This section explains such standard operations as turning the server on/off and
inserting/ejecting CD-ROMs.
1
1.4.1 Sliding the Drive Cover
1
Turn the drive cover key counterclockwise to unlock the cover.
Drive cover key
2
Slide the drive cover.
Slide the drive cover down to use the floppy disk drive, CD-ROM drive, or a 5-inch internal
option device.
Drive cover
ꢀ
The driver cover key is unique to each device. Do not lose the key. If the key is lost, the lock must be
broken and replaced on a paid basis. Manage the drive cover key very carefully. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer if you lose it.
31
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.2 Opening the Rack Door
This section explains how to open the front and rear doors of the 40U standard rack.
Refer to the manual included with the rack for procedures on opening other rack doors.
■ Opening the Front Door
1
Turn the rack key and pull the rack handle up.
2
Turn the handle in the direction of the arrow and pull it forward.
Turn and then pull
32
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Opening the Rear Door
1
Turn the rack key and pull the rack handle up.
1
2
Turn the handle in the direction of the arrow and pull it forward.
Turn and then pull
ꢀ
Unless you are inserting/removing media or turning the power on/off, keep the door closed. Doing so
blocks electric waves from cell phones, etc.
ꢀ
Do not lose the keys. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer if you do lose them.
33
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.3 Turning On the Server
• Do not move, strike, or shake the server when it is turned on. This can damage
the hard disk in the server and cause data loss.
• Turn the server on when the temperature is in its operating environment range
(10-35°C). For details about the operating environment, refer to "Start Guide"
and "Safety Precautions".
When operating the device outside of this operating environment, the server
may operate improperly, damage data etc.
Furthermore, Fujitsu cannot be held responsible for any related damage, malfunction,
or loss of data, etc.
• The fans rotate at high speed immediately after the server is turned on, but this
is not defective. When the temperature is in the server's operating environment
range (10-35°C), they start to rotate at normal speed later.
Also, when the ServerView is installed, the fans rotate at high speed after the
OS is started, but this is not defective. When the temperature is in the server's
operating environment range (10-35°C), they start to rotate at normal speed
later.
• Be sure to wait for 10 seconds or more after shutdown before turning the
server on.
1
Slide the drive cover.
2
3
4
Make sure that the floppy disk drive and CD-ROM drives are empty.
Turn on the display and peripheral devices.
Turn the main switch on the server rear panel to "1".
ꢀ
Once you turn it to "1", you do not have to activate it every time you start up the server. Turn
this switch only when it is set to "0".
34
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
Press the power switch on the front of the server.
The server's power LED is lit green.
When the power is turned on, the server performs Power On Self Tests (POST). If any
abnormalities are detected by POST, error messages are displayed ("9.2.2 Error Messages"
(ꢁpg.268)).
1
The server's power
LED is lit green
ꢀ
The time to turn on the server can be set with the ASR setting (on the [Power On/Off] tab) using
ServerView supplied with this server. For details, refer to "3.2 Settings for Server Monitoring" in
"ServerView User’s Guide".
35
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.4 Turning Off the Server
• Follow the procedures below to turn off the server. Data can be lost if
these procedures are not followed correctly.
• In the event of smoke or sparks, immediately unplug the electric cord.
Failure to do so could lead to a fire or electrocution.
1
Slide the drive cover.
2
3
Make sure that the floppy disk drive and CD-ROM drives are empty.
Shut down the OS.
In the following cases, the server is turned off after the OS is shut down (Step 4 is not necessary).
• Windows OS
• ServerView is installed
In other cases, make sure that the floppy disk and hard disk access LEDs are off when the OS is
shut down.
4
Press the power switch on the front of the server.
The server's power LED is lit amber.
The servers power
LED is lit amber
5
Turn off the display and peripheral devices.
• Be sure to wait for 10 seconds or more after shutdown before turning the
server on.
ꢀ
The time to turn the server off can be set with the ASR setting (on the [Power On/Off] tab) using
ServerView. For details, refer to "3.2 Settings for Server Monitoring" in "ServerView User’s Guide."
To turn the power off completely, turn the main switch on the rear of the server to "0" (for the standard
power supply) or remove the power plug from the outlet.
ꢀ
36
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Cautions when Turning the Power Off (When the OS is Windows
Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server)
•
For Windows Server 2003
"Do Nothing", "Prompt Input", "Standby", "Hibernation", or "Shutdown" can be specified as the
operating mode of the power switch in the OS settings (normally, "Shutdown" is specified).
For Windows 2000 Server
1
•
"Standby", "Hibernation", or "Power Off" can be specified as the operating mode of the power switch
in the OS settings (normally, "Power Off" is specified).
On this server, functions corresponding to "Standby" and "Hibernation" are supported as BIOS and
hardware functions. However, some drivers and software installed in the server do not support these
functions. For this reason, functions corresponding to "Standby status" and "Hibernation status" are
unavailable on this server.
When the operating mode is set to "Standby" or "Hibernation", the system may operate improperly or
hard disk data may be corrupted. For details about operating mode settings, refer to the OS manual.
1.4.5 Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk
■ Cautions
When using floppy disks, note the following points to avoid failures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not expose the disk to any fluids.
Do not open the shutter of the floppy disk and touch the disk surface.
Do not bend the floppy disk or place heavy objects on it.
Do not expose the floppy disk to strong magnetic fields.
Do not drop the floppy disk on hard surfaces.
Do not store the disk in extremely hot or cold conditions.
Do not store the disk in humid or dusty conditions.
Do not put layers of labels on the floppy disk. Doing so may cause the drive to be clogged with the
disk.
•
Keep the disk away from condensation or water droplets.
37
Chapter 1 Overview
■ Inserting the Floppy Disk
Insert the floppy facing the label up into the floppy disk drive at the side with a shutter. It makes a
clicking sound and, the floppy disk eject button pops out.
Floppy disk
■ Ejecting the Floppy Disk
Make sure that the floppy disk access LED is off. Press the floppy disk eject button.
Floppy disk access LED
Floppy disk eject button
ꢀ
Do not eject the floppy disk while the floppy disk access LED is on. Doing so may damage data.
38
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.4.6 Inserting and Ejecting a CD-ROM
This section explains how to insert and eject a CD-ROM.
When using CD-ROMs, note the following points to avoid failures:
1
■ Cautions for Handling CD-ROMs
•
•
•
•
Do not put labels, or apply ink or pencil, to both sides of the CD-ROM.
Do not touch or scratch the data side of the CD-ROM.
Do not bend the CD-ROM or place heavy objects on it.
When cleaning the CD-ROM, use a slightly wet cloth to wipe it from the center to the edge, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth.
•
•
•
Do not expose the disk to any fluids.
Do not store the disk in extremely hot or cold conditions.
Do not store the disk in humid or dusty conditions.
■ Cautions for Handling Drives
•
ROMs" (ꢁpg.39), or distorted, broken, or cracked CD-ROMs. Doing so may cause failures. If the
above CD-ROMs are used and the drive fails, the warranty will be invalidated.
This server supports only circular CD-ROMs. Do not use noncircular CD-ROMs. Doing so may
cause failures. If noncircular CD-ROMs are used and the drive fails, the warranty will be invalidated.
If commercially available CD-ROM cleaning disks are used, dust may get on the lens. Do not use
CD-ROM cleaning disks.
•
•
•
•
Some copy control music CDs cannot be used.
This server supports CD-ROMs with the following logo. Do not use CD-ROMs without the logo.
Doing so may cause failures.
39
Chapter 1 Overview
■ Inserting the CD-ROM
1
Make sure the server is turned on and press the CD-ROM eject button.
The CD-ROM tray comes out.
CD-ROM eject button
2
Place the CD-ROM (label side up) onto the tray.
CD-ROM
3
Move the tray back.
Push the tray gently until it clicks into position.
ꢀ
Push the center of the front panel gently until the tray clicks into position.
■ Ejecting the CD-ROM
To eject the CD-ROM, check that the CD-ROM access LED is off and then press the CD-ROM eject
button.
40
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
1.5 Workflow
To start the server operation, perform the following procedures.
1
Installing the server
Referring to "Safety Precautions" and "Start Guide" install the server to a suitable place.
Preparing the server
- Install hardware options
- Set hardware
Referring to "2.1 Preparation on the server", "Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options" and
"Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities".
Selecting the installation method
Referring to "2.2 Selecting the Installation Method" decide what installation method to use.
ServerStart, a software that enables everything from OS installation/setup to the installation of high
reliability tools to be performed in one operation, comes with this server. It is recommended that
ServerStart is used to perform installation.
Checking precautions on installation
Before installing the OS check the precautions on installation by referring to "2.3 Precautions on Installation".
OS installation
Using ServerStart
Manual installation
Referring to "Chapter 3 OS Installation Using
ServerStart" perform OS installation.
Referring to "Chapter 4 Manual OS
Installation" perform OS installation.
Installing hardware options
Referring to "Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options" install the hardware options.
Procedures before operation
Before operating the server refer to "Chapter 5 Operations after OS installation".
High reliability tool installation
When the OS is installed manually, it is necessary to install high reliability tools ServerView requires
settings before server operation. For installation method and details about each high reliability tool, refer
to “Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool”.
Start operations
41
Chapter 1 Overview
42
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.1 Preparation on the Server
Before starting installation, install internal options to the server and perform
necessary hardware settings.
2.1.1 Installing Internal Options
Internal options are classified into those that must be installed before the OS installation and those that
must be installed after the OS installation.
● Internal Options That Must be Installed before the OS installation
•
•
•
Memory modules
CPUs
Expansion cards
● Internal Options That Must be Installed after the OS installation
•
•
Optional SCSI devices
Internal hard disk units where the Operation System is not installed
ꢁ
If an internal option device that must be installed after the OS installation has been already installed,
remove the device, install the OS, then reinstall the device.
■ Cautions for Installing an Expansion Card
When using an expansion card, read the notes on the expansion card.
■ Cautions for Installing an Optional SCSI Device
When adding an optional SCSI device (DAT, etc.) using a SCSI card, connect it after installing the OS.
Connecting it before OS installation may result in improper drive letter assignment.
■ Cautions for Installing a Memory Module
This server supports up to 6GB of memory. However, the maximum installable size varies depending on
the OS. Furthermore, since the server uses part of the memory as PCI resources, the maximum available
size is limited. The following shows the maximum installable size and the maximum available size.
table: Maximum Installable Size and Maximum Available Size
Installed memory
size
OS
Available memory size
Windows 2000 Server *1
Windows Server 2003, Standard
Edition *1
3.0GB or smaller
3.5 to 4.0GB
Same as the installed memory size
Installed memory size - (0.1 to 0.6GB) *2
44
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Maximum Installable Size and Maximum Available Size
Installed memory
size
OS
Available memory size
Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise
Edition
3.0GB or smaller
3.5 to 6.0GB
Same as the installed memory size
Installed memory size - (0.1 to 0.6GB) *2
*1: Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition support up to 4GB of memory.
*2: Because 0.1 to 0.6 GB of memory is used as PCI resources, the available memory size varies depending on
the installed card.
2
BIOS setting for installing 4GB or more of memory
ꢁ
To install 4GB or more of memory, select the [Advanced System Configuration] submenu from the
[Advanced] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility and set [Remap PCI Memory Gap] to "Enabled". For more
● Cautions Applicable When the OS is Windows Server 2003, Enterprise
Edition or Windows 2000 Advanced Server
When installing 4GB or more of memory in a server operating with Windows 2000 Advanced Server or
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition, the /PAE option in the "Boot.ini" file must be described. For
the procedure for editing the "Boot.ini" file, refer to the manual supplied with the OS.
ꢁ
The "Boot.ini" file is an important file for the system. If the file is edited improperly, the system may not
start up. Edit it carefully.
"Boot.ini" file description example
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)?WINNT="Microsoft
Windows 2000 Advanced Server" /PAE /fastdetect
■ LAN Cable
Be sure to connect the LAN cable when the server is not connected to the Internet. If the OS is installed
or applications are automatically installed without connecting the LAN cable to the LAN card, an error
may be recorded in the event viewer after setup completes.
ꢁ
Connecting to the Internet during setup can cause security problems. Do not connect to the Internet
until the setup completes.
45
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.1.2 Hardware Settings
Before starting installation, set necessary hardware, such as the BIOS Setup Utility.
■ BIOS Setup Utility
The BIOS Setup Utility must be set in the following cases. For details on how to set the BIOS Setup
● Changing the Boot Drive
To change the boot drive, start up the BIOS Setup Utility, select [Boot Option], and set the boot drive.
● Performing Remote Installation
Before performing remote installation of ServerStart, use the following procedures to enable network
startup (PXE). In addition, check the MAC address.
1
Take the following steps in the BIOS Setup Utility.
1. Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
2. Select [Boot Options] and press the [Enter] key.
The Boot Options menu window appears.
3. Change [MultiBoot for HDs] to [Enabled].
4. Press the [Esc] key and select the [Advanced] menu.
5. Select the [Peripheral Configuration] submenu and change [LAN Remote Boot] to
[PXE].
6. Press the [Esc] key. Select [Save Changes & Exit] from the [Exit] menu to exit the
BIOS Setup Utility.
7. Start the BIOS Setup Utility again.
8. Select the [Boot Option] submenu from the [Main] menu. Press the [Enter] key.
The Boot Option submenu window appears.
9. Change the [Boot Sequence] settings as shown below.
1 BootManage PXE, Slot 0400
2 CD-ROM
3 Removable Device
4 Hard Drive
10. Exit the BIOS Setup Utility and turn the server off.
2
Check the MAC address.
Start up the server from the network.
The MAC address is displayed as shown below.
CLIENT MAC ADDR: XX XX XX XX XX XX
The MAC address is required for remote installation. Write it down.
46
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
ꢁ
ꢁ
You can turn the power on from a client (via a LAN) by utilizing the Wakeup On LAN (WOL) function.
Be sure to install ServerView to control the power supply via a LAN.
■ SCSI Setup Utility
The SCSI Setup Utility is used for setting the onboard SCSI of this server.
Check or change settings as necessary before installation, referring to "8.3 SCSI Setup Utility"
(ꢀpg.251).
2
47
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.2 Selecting the Installation Method
When installing the OS for the first time, there are multiple installation methods. Refer
to the following to decide on the method.
ꢁ
To set up multiple servers with the same model and configuration, refer to "3.5 Installation on Multiple
(the Second and Subsequent) Servers" (ꢀpg.108).
Linux
For the use of Linux, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY
website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
What OS will you use?
Windows Server 2003
/Windows 2000 Server
Installation is performed manually.
Refer to "4.2 Starting Manual Installation"
perform installation.
No
Will you use ServerStart?
Yes
When setting setup information in advance on
the client computer, refer to "3.2 Preconfiguration
Mode" and perform installation.
Refer to "3.1 Guided Mode" perform installation.
* If you follow the wizard setup will be performed
correctly.
■ Installation Using ServerStart
When an OS is installed using ServerStart, the driver for the expansion card that is automatically
recognized will be installed automatically. In addition, high reliability tools and array controller
administrative tools are installed automatically. Installation using ServerStart is recommended.
■ Installation While Maintaining the Established RAID Environment
In guided mode or preconfiguration mode, select [Use existing array] for [Configuration Mode] at
[RAID Wizard] (in the [RAID Configuration] window) and install the OS.
■ Installation Using ServerStart While Maintaining the Existing
Partitions
In expert mode, start up Disk Manager, format the installation partition, and install the OS.
48
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.3 Precautions on Installation
Read the following notes before starting OS installation.
2.3.1 Installation Partition Size
For installation using ServerStart, the installation partition size can be set as follows, depending on the
OS to be installed and format.
2
table: Installation Partition Size
Available size
Minimum
Maximum
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000 Server
2200MB
2TB
2048MB
2TB
● Notes
•
When you want to set the OS and BOOT partitions in different partitions, specify the partition size
directly.
(The BOOT partition is the partition for startup. Minimum information required for startup, such as
"ntldr", is stored.
The OS partition is the partition for installing the OS.)
•
•
In either of the following cases, specify a partition size less than 2TB.
• When the same partition is specified as the OS and BOOT partitions
• When different partitions are specified as the OS and BOOT partitions
The OS cannot be installed in a partition larger than 2TB.
49
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.3.2 Notes on Configuring RAID
Take the following notes when you configure a RAID system.
■ Hardware Configuration
•
•
•
Only internal hard disk units can be used.
Be sure to use hard disk units of the same model and with the same capacity.
Up to six hard disk units can be installed in the standard server. When the internal hard disk unit bay
conversion kit is used, up to nine units can be installed. Do not set the number of units more than the
maximum.
•
The number of units that can be set at each RAID level is as follows:
• RAID level 0: 2 to 9 units
• RAID level 1: 2 units
• RAID level 5 (recommended): 3 to 9 units
• RAID level 10: Even number of units between 4 and 8
ꢀ
When the OS is installed using ServerStart, only one RAID card can be installed. If you need more
cards, install them after OS installation.
■ Array Configuration
The following shows the pack order of hard disk units for a two-channel configuration.
For more details on the array configuration, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the
server, and "Supplement" supplied with options.
table: Array Configuration
Item
Contents
Number of physical packs
Number of system drives
Pack order of hard disk units
1
1
Channels 0 and 1 are packed alternately in ascending order of SCSI-
ID set for the hard disk units (in a two-channel configuration).
E.g.:(In a two-channel configuration)
Pack A-1 Channel 0 SCSI-ID 0
Pack A-2 Channel 1 SCSI-ID 0
Pack A-3 Channel 0 SCSI-ID 1
Pack A-4 Channel 1 SCSI-ID 1
Pack A-5 Channel 0 SCSI-ID 2
When a hot spare is specified, the hard disk unit with the smallest
channel number and the smallest SCSI-ID will be used as the hot
spare hard disk unit (normally, Channel 0 and SCSI-ID 0).
50
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Checking before OS Installation
•
When a RAID-configured disk is used
Unnecessary partition information and array configuration information is sometimes written to hard
disks that have been previously used and problems that cannot be anticipate may occur with the same
data.
When connecting a previously used hard disk to this server, perform low level format in advance on
another system and then connect to this server. For details about low level formatting, refer to the
manual that comes with system being used. When performing low level formatting on a hard disk
Number of disk units
2
•
If the number of actually installed units is smaller than the setting for the number of units (+1 when a
hot spare is specified), installation using ServerStart is aborted because of an error.
When the number of installed disk units is greater than the setting, the disk units are set up according
to the setting. Extra units will be configured as standby disk units. You can add a physical pack later.
For more details, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement"
supplied with options.
2.3.3 Notes on a Multiple LAN Adapter Configuration
Using the OS installation wizard of ServerStart, you can configure multiple LAN adapters (network
adapters) on the system. However, there are the following limitations.
● Adapter Numbers
To configure multiple LAN cards, select the adapter numbers in order of Adapter 1 and Adapter 2, and
enter settings for each adapter. Note that the order of adapter numbers is not necessarily the same as the
order of slots for the installed LAN adapters. This means that the setting for Adapter 1 is not always
applied to the onboard LAN. After installing the OS, check the LAN adapters to make sure that they are
configured as intended.
2.3.4 Cautions for Using ServerStart
■ Operating ServerStart
Most ServerStart operations are performed with the mouse. Items may not be moved with the [Tab] key
or cursor keys. Be sure to use the mouse when operating ServerStart.
■ Ejecting the CD-ROM
Do not eject the ServerStart CD-ROM while ServerStart is running. If the ServerStart CD-ROM is
ejected and inserted again, ServerStart starts up in multiple windows, and settings you have made can be
lost.
51
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
■ Exiting ServerStart
After operation in guided or expert mode, exiting ServerStart restarts the system. Remove disks from the
floppy disk and CD-ROM drives and click [OK]. When the display on the screen disappears, turn off the
system.
■ License for Use of System for ServerStart
"License for Use of System for ServerStart" linked from the ServerStart startup window is a license for
use of Windows PE contained in the ServerStart CD-ROM. Windows PE for starting up ServerStart can
be only used for installing Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 Server provided under a separate
legal license.
■ Setting Up the Printer
ServerStart does not support setup of printers. Perform installation after setup is completed.
52
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.3.5 Expansion Cards Supported by ServerStart
ServerStart supports automatic driver installation for the following expansion cards.
table: Automatic Expansion Card Driver Installation
Name
Model
Bus
Onboard FDD/IDE
Onboard LAN
Onboard VGA
RAID Card
-
-
-
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
-
PG-140D1
PG-142E3
PG-1852
PG-1862
PG-1882
PG-1892
PG-128
PG-FC106
2
LAN Card
SCSI Ctrl U160
Fiber Channel Controller
2.3.6 Cautions for Manual Installation
■ Notes on Using a RAID Card
The RAID card must be configured before the OS is installed. To check the RAID card settings, start up
WebBIOS. For more details, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and
"Supplement" supplied with options.
■ Free Space Required for Installation
The partition where the OS is installed must have enough free space for obtaining memory dump. For
■ Cautions on Restarting
In the course of installation, a message appears to indicate that the setup program restarts. Wait until it
restarts.
For background operations, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and
"Supplement" supplied with options.
53
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart
on a Client Computer
When using the preconfiguration mode for setting installation information in advance
or when creating a driver disk using the FloppyBuilder function, install ServerStart on
the client computer.
● System Requirements for Client Computers
Client computers must satisfy the following requirements.
Hardware
Personal computers operated with Windows NT, Windows XP Professional, or Windows
2000 Professional
(A CD-ROM drive and 10MB or more of free space are required.)
Software
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
2.4.1 Installing ServerStart
ꢀ
If a different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it. The FloppyBuilder function or
installation wizard may not operate properly on a different version.
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
The [ServerStart Launcher] window appears.
When the [ServerStart Launcher] window does not appear, execute "Launcher.exe" in the CD-
ROM.
2
Click [OK].
The Windows installer starts and the setup window appears.
54
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
4
5
6
Click [Next].
The [License Agreement] window appears.
Select [I accept the license agreement] and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
Enter the user information of the software and click [Next].
The [Installation Folder] window appears.
2
Specify the installation folder and click [Next]. To change the installation folder,
click [Browse] and select the folder.
The [Select Features] window appears.
7
Set [ServerStart - remote installation] to "Disable this function" and click [Next].
The [Ready to Install the Application] window appears.
55
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
8
Specify whether or not to copy the contents of the CD.
When you select [Yes] for "enable the use of ServerStart without CD.", you can start the
preconfiguration mode on the client computer without using the CD-ROM.
If you select [Yes], specify the target folder. The target folder must have enough free space to
copy the contents of the CD-ROM.
ꢀ
On WindowsNT, the CD-ROM is not copied. You must click [No]. The ServerStart CD-ROM is
required to start ServerStart.
9
Click [Next].
Installation is executed.
ꢀ
If a message prompting you to restart the system appears before or after installation, eject the
CD-ROM and restart the system according to the message. When the system restarts, insert
the ServerStart CD-ROM and start installation again.
If the “This program does not respond.” message appears during restart operation, click [Exit]
to continue the restart operation.
When the installation is completed, the completion window appears.
10 Click [Exit].
ServerStart has been installed to the client computer.
56
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2.4.2 Uninstalling ServerStart
Perform the following procedures to uninstall ServerStart from the client computer.
1
2
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click [Add or Remove Applications] ([Add or Remove Programs] on
some operating systems).
2
3
Select [Fujitsu ServerStart] and click [Remove] (or [Modify]).
When the uninstallation is executed successfully, Fujitsu ServerStart is deleted.
If [ServerStart - remote installation] has been installed using ServerStart, "FjPXEServer" seems
undeleted. Leave it and complete the operation.
ꢀ
On Windows 2000 Professional clients, "Add or Remove Applications" may become unable to respond
during uninstallation. If this occurs, log off the system.
57
Chapter 2 Checking before OS Installation
58
Chapter 3
OS Installation Using
ServerStart
This chapter explains how to install the OS in the
server using ServerStart.
3.1 Guided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.2 Preconfiguration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.3 Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.4 Remote Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.5 Installation on Multiple (the Second and Subsequent) Servers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
59
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1 Guided Mode
In guided mode, follow the wizard to specify hardware configuration and the OS to be
installed, save the information necessary for installation in a configuration file, and
install the OS.
3.1.1 Starting Up the Guided Mode
Start up the guided mode.
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
60
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
3
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes.
61
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts. When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created" message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
"Please Select your keyboard" Window appears.
Select your keyboard language from the drop-down list and click [OK].
The subsequent start procedure may take several minutes. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window
appears.
7
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
8
9
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Click the OS to install.
62
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
10 Click [Prepare & initiate an unattended installation of (OS)].
The guided mode for the selected OS starts up.
3
Start up the wizards to set items in the following procedures.
Exiting the wizard returns the display to the guided mode window.
Open/create configuration file
RAID wizard
Disk wizard
(connected disks are displayed)
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Close/save configuration file
Starting OS installation
63
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.2 Open/create a Configuration File
Open a configuration file. Or create a new one.
1
Click [Start here to create a complete configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
ꢀ
Once a configuration file is opened, another file cannot be opened until you click [Close and
save Configuration File].
2
3
Select the configuration file and click [Create].
The [Create] is changed to the [Continue].
Click [Continue].
64
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.1.3 RAID Wizard
Configure RAID.
ꢀ
When changing the RAID card, delete the physical pack beforehand. For details on how to delete a
physical pack, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement" supplied
with options.
1
Click [RAID Wizard: Settings for the RAID system].
The [RAID Configuration] window appears.
Only array controllers already installed are displayed.
The number of hard disk units connected to the array controller is displayed.
3
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When installing to the onboard SCSI, be sure to set the configuration mode to "Use existing
array" before exiting the wizard.
If you open a configuration file that has been created before, displayed settings may differ from
the previously set values. Be sure to check the settings.
One hot spare (standby disk) can be configured. However, it cannot be set for RAID0. When
the hot spare disk is set to "Yes", set the number of disk units to the number of installed disk
units minus 1.
E.g.: When four hard disk units are installed, set the RAID level to "RAID5", and when the hot
spare disk is set to "Yes", set the number of disk units to "3".
2
Set items and click [leave wizard].
The RAID wizard closes.
65
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.4 Disk Wizard
Create and format hard disk partitions.
ꢀ
The disk wizard starts up with the default settings. Be sure to click [MODIFY] to check the settings.
Change them as necessary.
1
Click [Disk Wizard: Hard disk partitioning and formatting].
The [Disk Overview] window appears.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the installation disk has partitions, check [Erase all existing partitions on all displayed
disks].
When other disks than the installation disk have an active partition, create a partition on the
disks with an active partition and check [Erase all existing partitions on all displayed disks].
The default setting for the controller type is "RAID". Use this setting.
2
Add, remove, or modify partitions as necessary.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Partition size of the FAT file system
When "FAT" is selected in [File system] and a value equal to or more than 4095MB or "Auto-
matic setting" is specified in [Partition size], the size of created partitions will be 4095MB.
The following limits apply to the volume label length. A volume label longer than the limit may
be used. However, it can cause installation failure. Enter a volume label within the limit.
•FAT: Up to 11 characters
•NTFS: Up to 32 characters
66
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
Add a partition
1. Click [ADD].
The [Disk Configuration] window appears.
3
2. Set items and click [continue].
The new partition is added to the partition list.
Remove a partition
1. Select the partition to remove and click [REMOVE].
The partition is removed.
Modify the partition configuration
1. Select the partition to modify and click [MODIFY].
The [Disk Configuration] window appears.
2. Change items and click [continue].
The partition is modified.
3
Click [leave wizard] after settings are completed.
The disk wizard closes.
ꢀ
If you are in guided mode and want to start up the disk wizard again after exiting the wizard, save the
configuration file.
ServerStart may restart when the disk wizard restarts. If this occurs, open the configuration file you
have saved and start setting from the item where you have discontinued. If the configuration file is not
saved, the settings are lost. Start setting again from the beginning.
67
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.5 OS Installation Wizard
Set computer information, user information, and the network protocol.
ServerStart can configure multiple network patterns. When configuring a domain controller, refer to
"Using ServerStart to Configure the Network".
ꢀ
The setup window differs depending on the OS to be installed. The following describes operations on
Windows Server 2003.
1
Click [Operating System Wizard: Operating system parameters].
The [Windows Installation] window appears.
2
Enter the password in [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat
Password] and click [Next].
ꢀ
If the password differs between [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat Pass-
word], an error dialog window appears. Enter the password correctly.
The [Computer Identification] window appears.
68
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Set items and click [Next].
The [Installation Directory and Time Zone] window appears.
3
4
Set items and click [Next].
The [User Name] window appears.
5
Set items and click [Next].
The [Display Settings] window appears.
69
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
6
Set items and click [Next].
The [Network Protocol] window appears.
70
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7
Set items and click [Next].
The [Software Components] window appears.
3
71
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
8
Set items and click [Next].
The [Services] window appears.
9
Set items and click [leave wizard].
The OS installation wizard closes.
72
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.1.6 Application Wizard
Specify installation of supplied applications such as high reliability tools.
1
Click [Application Wizard: Select additional software components].
The application wizard appears.
3
2
3
From the [Installable applications] list, select applications to be installed and
click [>>].
Set all applications to be installed on the [Selected applications] list.
Click [leave wizard].
The application wizard closes.
73
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.1.7 Close/save the Configuration File
When settings in all wizards are completed, save the configuration file.
1
2
Click [Close and save Configuration File].
The [Save ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
Click [Save As].
The configuration file is saved.
ꢀ
You can specify any name for the configuration file. However, OS installation is possible only
when it is saved as "SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the OS, make sure to save it as "Ser-
StartBatch.ini" on the ServerStart floppy disk.
3.1.8 Start OS Installation
Install the OS to the server.
During installation, do not use the mouse or keyboard unless it is necessary for installation operations.
Otherwise, installation may fail.
1
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
The [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
2
Click [Start now].
ꢀ
Clicking [Start now] deletes all disk contents and starts installation. Click [Stop] when you do
not perform installation.
74
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
After 10 seconds, installation starts automatically.
• When RAID has been configured, the system restarts.
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK].
This message does not appear when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY
Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) has been inserted already.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
3
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
3
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
4
5
6
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
Then the system is restarted.
The system continues the installation operation after restart.
OS GUI setup, LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory
installation are performed automatically.
7
When a confirmation message to restart appears, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools.
8
9
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
10 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
75
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.2 Preconfiguration Mode
In preconfiguration mode, set and save the information necessary for installation in a
configuration file on a client computer (with a CD-ROM drive and 10MB or more of
free space). Set the saved configuration file on the server for installation.
ꢀ
If ServerStart is not installed in the client computer where the preconfiguration mode is executed, refer
to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client Computer" (ꢁpg.54) to install ServerStart. If a
different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For details
on how to uninstall ServerStart, refer to "2.4.2 Uninstalling ServerStart" (ꢁpg.57).
ꢀ
If ServerStart is started up on a computer where a different version of ServerStart is installed, the
installation wizard may not operate properly. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
3.2.1 Starting Up the Preconfiguration Mode
Start up the preconfiguration mode.
1
Start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to start it up again. If it has not, start it
up according to the following procedures:
For Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP Professional, and if the contents of the
ServerStart CD-ROM has been copied to the computer
1. Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
For Windows NT, or if the ServerStart CD-ROM has not been copied to the computer
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer's CD-ROM drive.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
76
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
3
3
4
Click [ServerStart Status Diskette].
A message prompting you to insert the floppy disk appears.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server and click [OK].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts. When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created." message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
Click [
(HOME)] on the tool bar.
The display returns to the [Welcome to ServerStart] window.
7
Click [Click here to prepare an operating system installation for a PRIMERGY
Server].
The [Prepare the installation of an operating system for PRIMERGY Servers] window.
ꢀ
Before starting installation, click [Cautions for Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
8
Click [Creation of a ServerStart Configuration file for the installation of an
Microsoft Windows Operating System].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
77
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
9
Select the OS to be installed.
The [Preparing the Installation] window appears.
78
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.2.2 Configure Settings in Wizards
Click the wizards to set items in the following procedures. For setting procedures, refer to description on
guided mode wizards ("3.1.2 Open/create a Configuration File" (ꢁpg.64) to "3.1.6 Application Wizard"
(ꢁpg.73)).
Exiting a wizard returns the display to the preconfiguration mode window.
Open/create configuration file
RAID wizard
Disk wizard
3
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Close/save configuration file
Activate ServerStart in the server
Starting OS installation
3.2.3 Close/save the Configuration File
When settings in all wizards are completed, save the configuration file.
1
Click [Close and save Configuration File].
The [Save ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
79
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
2
Click [Save As].
The [ServerStart Remote Installation IP Settings] window appears.
3
4
Set items when performing remote installation.
Click [Set].
The configuration file is saved.
ꢀ
You can specify any name for the configuration file. However, OS installation is possible only when it is
saved as "SerStartBatch.ini". When installing the OS, make sure to save it as "SerStartBatch.ini" on
the ServerStart floppy disk.
80
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.2.4 Starting OS Installation
Install the OS to the server using the created configuration file.
During installation, do not use the mouse or keyboard unless it is necessary for installation operations.
Otherwise, installation may fail.
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
A message prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk appears.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk containing the created configuration file and
click [OK].
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state. If it is write protected, installation will
fail.
3
The [Initializing ServerStart] window appears and the ServerStart initialization process starts.
Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When
initialization is completed, the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
3
Click [Start].
Installation starts.
• When RAID has been configured, the system restarts.
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK]. This message does not appear
when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) has
been inserted already.
81
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
4
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
5
6
7
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. The system continues the installation operation after restart. OS GUI setup,
LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory installation are
performed automatically.
8
9
When a confirmation message appears on restart, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools.
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
10 Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK]. The system restarts.
11 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
82
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.3 Expert Mode
In expert mode, start up Disk Manager, format the installation partition, and install the
OS.
Use the expert mode only when you want to perform installation while maintaining the
existing partitions. Use the guided mode for normal installation.
3.3.1 Starting Up the Expert Mode
Start up the expert mode.
3
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
Set the ServerStart floppy disk in the write-enabled state.
3
4
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes.
When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts. When the creation is completed, the "Floppy disk has
been created." message appears.
5
6
Click [OK].
"Please Select your keyboard" window appears.
Select your keyboard language from the drop-down list and click [OK].
The subsequent start procedure may take several minutes. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window
appears.
7
8
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Installation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
83
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
9
Select the OS to install.
10 Click [Install MS Windows Server 2003 interactively (expertise required)].
The expert mode starts.
Start up the configuration tools to set items in the following procedures. Exiting a tool returns to
the display to the expert mode window.
Disk manager
OS installation wizard
Application wizard
Starting OS installation
84
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.3.2 Disk Manager
Start up Disk Manager and format the installation partition.
1
Click [Use Disk Manager to partition and format your disk drives].
Disk Manager starts up.
3
2
Format the OS installation partition. Select the OS installation partition and click
the [Partition] menu → [Format].
The [Format Partition] window appears.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to specify the active partition on drive C.
Partitions equal to or larger than 4096MB cannot be FAT formatted.
3
4
Set items and click [Format].
The partition is formatted.
When the formatting is completed, click the [File] menu → [Exit].
Disk Manager closes and the display returns to the expert mode window.
85
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.3.3 OS Installation Wizard
Set computer information, user information, and the network protocol.
ServerStart can configure multiple network patterns. When configuring a domain controller, refer to
"Using ServerStart to Configure the Network".
ꢀ
The setting window differs depending on the OS to be installed. The following describes operations on
Windows Server 2003.
1
Click [Installation Wizard for MS Windows Server 2003].
A message prompting you to specify the configuration file appears.
2
3
Click [No].
The [Windows Installation] window appears.
Enter the password in [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat
Password] and click [Next].
ꢀ
If the password differs between [Password for Administrator account] and [Please repeat Pass-
word], an error dialog window appears. Enter the password correctly.
The [Computer Identification] window appears.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Set items and click [Next].
The [Installation Directory and Time Zone] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [User Name] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Display Settings] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Network Protocol] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Software Components] window appears.
Set items and click [Next].
The [Services] window appears.
86
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
10 Set items and click [leave wizard].
The display returns to the expert mode window.
3.3.4 Application Wizard
Specify installation of supplied applications such as high reliability tools.
3.3.5 Start OS Installation
Install the OS to the server.
3
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the installation partition is not empty, a confirmation message appears. If it does not matter, click
[OK] to continue the installation procedure.
If an incorrect setting (such as the CD key) is found during installation, an error window will appear.
Enter the correct value in the window to continue the installation procedure. However, corrections
made here are not reflected to the configuration file.
1
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
A confirmation window asking whether you want to save the current settings appears.
2
Click [Yes].
The following window appears.
87
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3
Enter the file name and click [Save As].
Installation starts automatically.
• If a message prompting you to insert the Service Pack CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
This message does not appear when Service Pack is not selected.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerView CD-ROM appears, insert the
PRIMERGY Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) and click [OK]. This message does not appear
when ServerView will not be installed or the PRIMERGY Document and Tool CD (Disc 1) has
been inserted already.
• If a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears, insert the CD-ROM
and click [OK].
4
When a message prompting you to insert the OS CD-ROM appears, insert the
CD-ROM and click [OK].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to insert the ServerStart CD-ROM appears.
5
6
7
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM and click [OK].
The License Agreement window appears.
Click [I Agree].
After files are copied, a message prompting you to eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk appears.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
Then the system is restarted.
The system continues the installation operation after restart.
OS GUI setup, LAN utility installation, Service Pack installation, and Active Directory
installation are performed automatically.
8
When a confirmation message to restart appears, click [Restart].
The system restarts and installs high reliability tools.
88
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9
When a message on installation completion appears, press any key.
10 Restart the system.
Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
11 When the system restarts, log on to the server using the Administrator account
for the local computer.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
Refer to "Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation" (ꢁpg.133) and perform necessary procedures
before starting server operations.
3
89
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.4 Remote Installation
ServerStart supports remote installation.
ꢀ
Before performing remote installation, be sure to read "Cautions for Remote Installation" in the online
help.
3.4.1 Overview of Remote Installation
Remote installation is a method to save resources necessary for installation, such as the OS and Service
Pack, in a different server on the network and install them via the network.
If a remote resource server is configured, you can install the same resources to multiple servers. This
method is useful in configuring multiple servers.
● Target Server and Remote Resource Server/PXE Server
A server to which resources are installed is called a "target server". A server that stores resources
necessary for remote installation is called a "remote resource server". A server that can start up a target
server through network startup (PXE) is called a "PXE server".
■ Installation Method
Remote installation uses a PXE or a remote resource server.
90
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Remote Installation Using a PXE Server
In remote installation using a PXE server, the network startup (PXE) function of the PXE server starts
up the target server and performs installation in preconfiguration mode. This method is used when the
target server does not have a CD-ROM or floppy disk drive.
Installation
using ServerStart
Activated be IP address,
boot image
1)
- OS
- Service Pack
- Application
etc.
2) Request resources
Target server
3) Supply resources
PXE server
3
In addition to the PXE server, a "remote resource server" that stores remote resources and a "DHCP
server" that performs the DHCP service are required for remote installation using a PXE server. When
you have only one server, store remote resources on the PXE server to install the DHCP service. When
you have multiple servers, select one for performing the DHCP service and another for storing remote
resources.
● Remote Installation Using a Remote Resource Server
In remote installation using a remote resource server, ServerStart starts up on the target server.
Procedures for starting installation are the same as those in normal installation (preconfiguration,
guided, and expert modes). Once installation started, resources necessary for installation are provided
from the remote resource server. Thus, procedures such as inserting a CR-ROM are not necessary.
Active ServerStart
and start installation
- OS
1) Request resources
- Service Pack
- Application
etc.
Target server
2) Supply resources
Remote resource server
91
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.4.2 System Requirements for Remote Resource/PXE
Servers
Because remote installation is performed via a network, the environment must have at least one
Windows server and a local area network.
In addition, the following environment is required.
■ Remote Resource/PXE Server Requirements
table: System Requirements for Remote Resource/PXE Servers
PXE server
Remote resource server
OS
Windows 2000 Server SP2 or later
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000 Server
Windows NT Server 4.0
Memory
256MB or more
256MB or more
Operating
environment
• DHCP server function (required on the same
network)
• File sharing function (required)
• File sharing function (required)
Notes on the PXE server
ꢀ
ꢀ
Check that no other PXE server exists on the same LAN.
Servers installed with software with the PXE function such as SystemcastWizard/SystemcastWizard
Professional, Quick Recovery Manager, or the Microsoft RIS function cannot be used as a PXE server.
■ Checking Server Free Space
Decide a server to use as a remote resource server / PXE server and check it for enough free space for
storing resources.
● Checking the Number of Servers
•
•
When you have only one server, use it as the remote resource server, PXE server, and DHCP service
server. Check it for the required amount of free space.
When you have multiple servers
• Check if a server performing the DHCP service exists. If not, decide a server for the DHCP
service.
• When there are multiple resources, they can be divided and stored in multiple remote resource
servers.
92
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Checking Server Free Space
The following table shows the amount of free space required for each installation resource.
table: Free Space Required for Resources
Resource
Required free space
About 650MB
644MB
ServerStart
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000 Server
472MB
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
433MB
Calculate the total resource size. Check that the remote resource server / PXE server has enough free
space (free space greater than the space required for the resources). When the amount of free space is
insufficient, you must use more remote resource servers.
3
3.4.3 Preparation of the PXE Server (When the PXE Server
is Used)
When performing remote installation using a PXE server, preparatory procedures, such as installing
ServerStart, are required.
Perform the following procedures to prepare the PXE server.
Starting the DHCP Service
Installing ServerStart
Checking Services
Setting TFTP
Preparation of Resources
■ Starting the DHCP Service
Check that the DHCP service is running on the same network.
If the DHCP service function is not installed, perform the following procedures (for Windows Server
2003) to install the DHCP service.
1
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Applications].
93
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
2
3
Click [Add or Remove Windows Components]. Click the [Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP)] service from [Network Services].
The DHCP service is installed.
Create and configure a DHCP scope so that the IP address can be distributed.
■ Installing ServerStart
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the PXE server.
The [ServerStart Launcher] window appears.
When the [ServerStart Launcher] window does not appear, execute "Launcher.exe" in the CD-
ROM.
2
3
4
5
Click [OK].
The Windows installer starts and the Setup window appears.
Click [Next].
The [License Agreement] window appears.
Select [I accept the license agreement] and click [Next].
The [User Information] window appears.
Enter the user information of the software and click [Next].
The [Installation Folder] window appears.
94
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Select the installation folder and click [Next].
To change the installation folder, click [Browse] and select the folder.
The [Select Features] window appears.
3
Configure [ServerStart - remote installation] so that it will be installed.
Clicking [Disk Cost] displays the following widow where you can check the amount of free
space.
95
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
7
Click [Next].
The [contents tree] window appears.
8
Configure the ServerStart image necessary for network startup (PXE) and click
[Next].
The [Useraccount for access to the content tree] window appears.
96
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9
Specify the user account for the content tree and click [Next].
The [PXE server] window appears.
3
10 Select [yes] when the PXE server performs the DHCP service or select [no]
when the DHCP and PXE servers are configured separately. Then click [Next].
The [PXE server] window appears.
11 When there are multiple LAN ports, click [select], select the LAN controller on
the LAN controller selection screen, and click [Next].
The [Important hint] window appears.
12 Click [Next].
The [Ready to Install the Application] window appears.
97
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
13 Click [show Readme file].
The [Readme] window appears. Read the text. When you finish, click [ ] in the upper-right
corner of the window to close the [Readme] window.
14 Click [Next].
The image file is copied.
The image file copying process takes about 10 to 20 minutes.
The installation completes when the installation completion window appears.
15 Click [Start] → [Shutdown]. Select [Restart] and click [OK].
The system restarts.
■ Checking Services
● Checking [PXE Services] and [TFTP Service]
1
2
Right-click the [My Computer] icon and click [Manage].
Select [Services] from [Services and Applications].
On the Services list, check that PXE Services and TFTP Service have been installed and started.
98
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Checking the DHCP Service
Perform the following check only when the PXE server performs the DHCP service.
1
2
On the PXE server, click [Start] → [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] →
[DHCP] to start up the DHCP administrative tool.
Click [Server Options] and check that the “060 ClassID” server option is added.
3
■ Setting TFTP
TFTP is an FTP service function that requires no authentication. In remote installation, the TFTP service
is used to distribute the boot image required for startup. For the TFTP path, set the appropriate access
rights for the Guest account to obtain the image via network startup (PXE).
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [Windows Explorer] and move to
the TFTP path (the default is C:\Program Files\Fujitsu
Siemens\DeploymentService\tftp).
2
Right-click the TFTP folder and click [Properties].
99
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3
Click the [Security] tab, add the Guest account, and set the "Read and
execute", "View folder contents list", and "Read" access permissions.
The preparation of the PXE server has been completed.
Then, perform "3.4.4 Preparation of Remote Resources" (ꢀpg.100).
3.4.4 Preparation of Remote Resources
Store resources to be installed on the remote resource server (PXE server) before starting installation.
ꢁ
For sharing resources, log on to the remote resource/PXE server with the Administrator account.
1
Prepare resources required for installation.
• CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
• Service Pack CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
• ServerStart floppy disk
• PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) (for installing ServerView)
• Others
2
3
Create a shared folder for storing resources.
Create a shared folder for each CD prepared in Step 1.
E.g.:E:\W2K3Sv for Windows Server 2003
Extract the resources.
Using Windows Explorer, copy the CD-ROM for the resource to the shared folder.
100
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.4.5 Starting Remote Installation Using a PXE Server
Perform remote installation using a PXE server in the following procedures.
Checking the Network Startup (PXE) Setting
Checking the MAC Address
Creating a Configuration File
(Setting of remote installation)
Starting remote Installation
3
■ Checking the Network Startup (PXE) Setting
Remote installation using a PXE server is performed via the onboard LAN. Enable the network startup
(PXE) of the target server.
■ Checking the MAC Address of the Onboard LAN
In remote installation, target servers are identified according to the MAC address. MAC addresses are
unique information to LAN cards. Check the MAC address on each target server. Write down the MAC
address of the onboard LAN. For details on how to check the MAC address of an onboard LAN, refer to
■ Creating a Configuration File
You can create a configuration file on a client computer before starting installation. For the procedure,
Wizards" (ꢀpg.79).
When creating a configuration file on the PXE server, start installation.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name prepared instead of the local CD-ROM as installation information.
101
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
■ Starting Installation
1
On the PXE server, start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, you do not have to restart it. If it is not started, click
[Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
2
3
4
Click [Click here to prepare an operating system installation for a PRIMERGY
Server].
The [Prepare the installation of an operating system for PRIMERGY Servers] window appears.
Click [Creation of ServerStart Configuration file for the installation of an
Microsoft Windows Operationg System].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Click the OS to install.
The [Preparing the Installation] window appears.
If a configuration file has already been created, go to Step 6.
5
6
Set items in wizards to create a configuration file.
Refer to "3.2.2 Configure Settings in Wizards" (ꢀpg.79). Set items in wizards and save the
configuration file.
Exiting a wizard returns to the preconfiguration mode window.
Click [Click here to initiate the Remote Installation Process].
The [Remote Installation Target Server] window appears.
102
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7
Configure remote installation.
3
1. Enter the "MAC address of the target system".
2. Select the "PRIMERGY model type".
3. Specify the "Configuration file" containing the installation settings.
8
Click [Start Installation].
Installation starts. All disk contents on the target server are deleted.
The [ServerStart Boot Manager] window appears.
Check that the status is "Waiting for client".
103
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
9
Turn on the target server.
It is started up via the network (PXE) and installation starts.
When the resources have been copied, the "Preparation for automatic OS installation has
completed." message appears.
Subsequent installation is performed automatically.
When the installation is completed, an installation completion message appears on the target
server.
10 Press any key on the target server.
11 Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
3.4.6 Starting Remote Installation Using a Remote
Resource Server
In remote installation using a remote resource server, installation is performed using shared resources on
the remote resource server.
■ Configuring a Remote Floppy
A remote floppy is a shared folder for storing and using a configuration file on the network, instead of
loading it from the ServerStart floppy disk. When the server does not have a floppy disk drive and
installation is performed in guided mode/expert mode, use a remote floppy.
1
2
Create a new folder in the shared folder on the remote resource server.
E.g.: C:\export\ServerStart\Floppy
Create a "ServerStart Floppy Disk" tag file for the ServerStart floppy disk. Start
up Command Prompt and enter the following command.
C:\>copy nul C:\export\ServerStart\Floppy\"ServerStart Floppy Disk"
■ Checking Remote Resources
Check that the remote resource server is shared properly.
1
Start up "Command Prompt" on the remote resource server. Enter the following
and press the [Enter] key.
prompt:>net share
Check that the created shared folder is displayed properly.
For the net command, refer to Windows Help.
104
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Starting Installation
Start installation from the target server.
● In Guided Mode/Expert Mode
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Create a ServerStart floppy disk.
When the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server is used
1. Insert the ServerStart floppy disk supplied with the server. Make sure that
"Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
The network startup setting window for remote installation appears.
2. Click [OK].
3
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation
will be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few
minutes. When the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window
appears.
3. Click [Build a ServerStart Floppy Disk].
Creation of a ServerStart floppy disk starts. When the creation is completed, the "Floppy
disk has been created." message appears.
When the remote floppy is used
1. Select "Remote (media)" and click [OK].
The [Network Startup Setting] window for remote installation appears.
2. Click [OK].
The [Specify Drive] window appears.
3. Enter [Remote path], [User name], and [Password] and click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation
will be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few
minutes. When the process is completed, the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
3
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operating system installation].
The [Select the operating sysytem to be installed] window appears.
Click [Special Hints on Operating System Instalation] and read the contents. Important
information such as limitations on disk configuration is described.
4
5
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Install Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
Select the OS to install and the mode.
105
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
6
Set items in wizards and save the configuration file.
For settings in wizards, refer to "3.1 Guided Mode" (ꢀpg.60) or "3.3 Expert Mode" (ꢀpg.83).
Set items in wizards and save the configuration file. When using the remote floppy, specify the
path to the shared folder for the remote floppy as the configuration file saving location.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name of the prepared shared folder instead of the local CD-ROM as instal-
lation source information.
7
8
9
Click [Click here, to Start the Installation of (OS)].
Installation starts. At steps where the CD-ROM for resources such as the OS to be installed is
necessary, the resource is automatically acquired from the resource server via the network.
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. When the installation is completed, an installation completion message
appears on the target server.
Press any key on the target server.
10 Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
before starting server operations.
● In Preconfiguration Mode
1
Create a configuration file.
ꢁ
Specify the shared name of the prepared shared folder instead of the local CD-ROM as instal-
lation source information.
2
3
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Set the created configuration file and click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When
the process is completed, the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears.
4
Click [Start].
Installation starts. At steps where the CD-ROM for resources such as the OS to be installed is
necessary, the resource is automatically acquired from the resource server via the network.
106
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
Eject the CD-ROM and floppy disk and click [OK].
The system restarts. When the installation is completed, an installation completion message
appears on the target server.
6
7
Press any key on the target server.
Restart the system on the target server.
The server setup and OS installation have been completed.
Refer to "Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation" (ꢀpg.133) and perform necessary procedures
before starting server operations.
3
107
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
3.5 Installation on Multiple (the
Second and Subsequent) Servers
This chapter explains how to perform installation on multiple servers using
ServerStart.
By editing the configuration file created for installation on the first server, you can use
it for installation on other servers of the same model and configuration. This reduces
the setup time. However, installation on the first server must be performed using
ServerStart in guided or preconfiguration mode.
ꢁ
Check that ServerStart supplied with the first server is of the same version as that supplied with the
other servers. If the version is different, this installation method will not work.
3.5.1 Preparation for Installation
■ Required Software
The following software is required for installation on the second and subsequent servers. Be sure to have
these items close at hand.
•
•
•
CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
ServerStart CD-ROM
ServerStart floppy disk
A: ServerStart floppy disk containing the configuration file used for installation on the first server
B: ServerStart floppy disks supplied with the ServerStart CD-ROMs for the second and subsequent
servers
If ServerStart floppy disks are not supplied, prepare as many floppy disks as there are servers.
PRIMERGY Document & Tool CD (Disc 1) (for installing ServerView)
Service Pack CD-ROM for the OS to be installed
•
•
■ Preparatory Procedure
Perform the following procedure before installation.
Using Explorer or Command Prompt, copy the ServerStart floppy disk (A) to the ServerStart floppy disk
(B).
108
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3.5.2 Installation in Guided Mode
Edit the configuration file and perform installation in guided mode.
1
2
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately after that.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk copied in the preparatory procedure into the
floppy disk drive and click [Create].
The network setting window for remote installation appears.
3
Click [OK].
The [Initialization of ServerStart core running] window appears and unattended installation will
be started. Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When
the process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
3
4
5
6
Click [or insert a Server Start Floppy Disk to Start Server Start].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
Click [Click here to prepare and/or initiate an operation system installation].
The [Select the operating system to be installed] window appears.
Click [MS Windows Operating Systems].
The [Microsoft Windows Operating System Installation] window appears.
7
8
Click the OS to install.
Click [Prepare & initiate an unattended installation of (OS)].
The guided mode starts.
9
Click [Start here to create a complete configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
10 Specify "SerStartBatch.ini" on drive A and click [Create].
The display returns to the guided mode window.
For procedures from setting wizards to completion of installation, refer to "3.1 Guided Mode"
(ꢀpg.60).
109
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
Settings values in wizards
ꢁ
Setting items in wizards are set to the values set on the first server. For installation on subse-
quent servers, you must change the following items in the “OS installation wizard”. For other
items, change the settings as necessary. You do not need to start up wizards where no settings
will be changed.
table: Settings to be Changed for Installation on Subsequent Servers
Window
name
Setting item name
Remarks
User
Information
Computer name
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
Product ID/CD key
IP address
The setting must be changed.
Network
Protocol
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
ꢁ
If the settings for the first server are not reflected to wizards, perform the procedure over again
from copying the floppy disk.
3.5.3 Installation in Preconfiguration Mode
Edit the configuration file and perform installation in preconfiguration mode.
If ServerStart is not installed in the client computer where the preconfiguration mode is executed, refer
to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client Computer" (ꢀpg.54) to install ServerStart. If a
different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For details
ꢁ
ServerStart starts up when it is installed. However, be sure to follow these installation procedures.
contents of the ServerStart floppy disk, making the disk unavailable for installation on multiple servers.
1
Start up ServerStart.
If ServerStart has already been started, you do not have to restart it. If it is not started, perform the
following startup procedures.
When the CD has been copied on Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1. Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used or CD has not been copied
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
2
Select the OS to be installed.
The preconfiguration mode starts up.
110
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
4
Insert the ServerStart floppy disk copied in the preparatory procedure into the
floppy disk drive and click [Start here to configuration file].
The [Open ServerStart Configuration File] window appears.
Specify "SerStartBatch.ini" on drive A and click [Create].
The display returns to the preconfiguration mode window.
For procedures from setting wizards to completion of installation, refer to "3.2 Preconfiguration
Mode" (ꢀpg.76).
When performing remote installation, refer to "3.4 Remote Installation" (ꢀpg.90).
Settings values in wizards
ꢁ
Setting items in wizards are set to the values set on the first server. For installation on subse-
quent servers, you must change the following items in the “OS installation wizard”. For other
items, change the settings as necessary. You do not need to start up wizards where no settings
will be changed.
3
table: Settings to be Changed for Installation on Subsequent Servers
Window
name
Setting item name
Remarks
User
Information
Computer name
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
Product ID/CD key
IP address
The setting must be changed.
Network
Protocol
The setting must be changed when the second
and subsequent servers are on the same
network as the first server.
ꢁ
If the settings for the first server are not reflected to wizards, perform the procedures from
copying the floppy disk over again.
111
Chapter 3 OS Installation Using ServerStart
112
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
4.1 Creating Driver Disks
When installing the OS manually, it is necessary to create driver installation disks
beforehand. Also, driver disks must be created when you add an expansion card
during server operation.
■ Preparation for Creating Driver Disks
You need floppy disks for driver disks. A floppy disk is necessary for each driver.
Driver disks are created using the ServerStart FloppyBuilder function. The FloppyBuilder function is
available in the following environments.
•
•
Starting up the ServerStart system on a client computer (Recommended)
Starting up the system from the ServerStart CD-ROM on the server
ꢀ
When creating driver disks on a client computer, it is necessary to install ServerStart on the client
computer beforehand. Install it according to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client
If a different version of ServerStart has been installed, uninstall it and install the proper version. For
ꢀ
The FloppyBuilder function may not operate correctly if you start up ServerStart while ServerStart of a
different version is installed in the computer. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
114
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.1.1 Required Driver Disks
The driver disks to be created differ depending on the OS to be installed.
■ For Windows Server 2003
table: Drivers Required for Installing Windows Server 2003
Expansion card / onboard controller
Chipset
Driver
Intel E7520/E7320 Chipset Ver6.2.0.1005
Standard driver provided with the OS
Graphic controller
RAID Card
(PG-140D1/PG-142E3)
PG-140D1/142E3 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk
V3.0L10 *1
Onboard SCSI
Onboard LAN
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Onboard SCSI Driver Windows 2003
Drivers Disk V1.0L10 *1
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Onboard LAN Driver for Windows
2000/2003 V7.6.6
LAN card
(PG-1852 / PG-1862 / PG-1882 / PG-1892)
PG-1852/1862/188x/189x LAN Driver for Windows 2003
Ver8.3 *1
SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128)
Standard driver provided with the OS
4
PG-FC106 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V5.10a10 *1
Driver supplied with the expansion card
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Other expansion cards
*1: Created from the ServerStart CD-ROM
■ For Windows 2000 Server
table: Drivers Required for Installing Windows 2000 Server
Expansion card / onboard controller
Chipset
Driver
Intel E7520/E7320 Chipset Ver6.2.0.1005
Graphic controller
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Onboard VGA Driver
Ver5.0.2195.5005
RAID card
(PG-140D1/PG-142E3)
PG-140D1/142E3 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk
V3.0L10 *1
Onboard SCSI
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Onboard SCSI Driver Windows 2000
Drivers Disk V1.0L10 *1
Onboard LAN
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 Onboard LAN Driver for Windows
2000/2003 V7.6.6
LAN card
(PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1882/PG1892)
PG-1852/1862/188x/189x LAN Driver for Windows 2000
Ver8.3 *1
SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128)
Standard driver provided with the OS
PG-FC106 Windows 2000/2003 Drivers Disk V5.10a10 *1
Driver supplied with the expansion card
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Other expansion cards
*1: Created from the ServerStart CD-ROM
ꢀ
115
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
4.1.2 How to Create Driver Disks
Driver disks are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM using the ServerStart FloppyBuilder function.
If ServerStart has already been started, you do not have to restart it. If it is not started, perform the
following startup procedures.
■ Starting ServerStart
● For Creation on a Client Computer
When the CD has been copied on Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
Professional
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
When Windows NT is used or the CD has not been copied
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
● For Creation on the Server
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the attached [ServerStart floppy disk] into the server's floppy disk drive.
Then make sure "Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
A network setup window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
If a configuration file already exists in the ServerStart floppy disk and [OK] is clicked without
clicking [Create], the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears. Make sure to click
[Exit]. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
If [Start] is clicked in the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window, the installation of the server
will start and all disk contents will be deleted.
116
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Click [OK].
The [Initializing ServerStart] window appears and unattended installation will be started.
Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When the
process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [or Insert a ServerStart Floppy Disk to Start ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
4
5
Eject the ServerStart floppy disk.
117
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
■ Creating Driver Disks
Start up ServerStart and confirm that the [Welcome to ServerStart] window is displayed.
1
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
2
Click [Drivers Diskettes].
The [FloppyBuilder Driver Disk] window appears.
3
4
Click the type of the driver you want to create.
Click the driver disk you want to create.
Follow the message and insert a floppy disk.
5
Perform the procedures following the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The driver disk is automatically created. When a message appears indicating that crating the disk
is completed, click [OK] and eject the floppy disk.
118
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.2 Starting Manual Installation
This section explains the procedures for installing the OS manually.
4.2.1 Installing Windows Server 2003
1
Create driver disks.
Prepare necessary drivers before installing Windows Server 2003.
Some drivers are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For how to create driver disks, refer to
2
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Turn on the server and insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM immediately into the CD-ROM
drive. Check there are no floppy disks in the floppy disk drive. When the active area is specified
on the hard disk, the following message appears.
4
Press any key to boot from CD....
Pressing any key while this message is displayed boots the system from the CD-ROM.
3
The [Windows Server 2003 Setup] window appears.
Immediately, the following message appears at the bottom of the window. Press the [F6] key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party
SCSI or RAID driver ...
ꢁ
This message will be displayed for a short time after the setup window (blue screen) appears.
Press the [F6] key immediately after the window turns blue.
4
Install the drivers manually.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows,
including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
119
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the driver disk created from the
ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use with
Windows, using a device support disk provided by an
adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list,
or press ESC to return to the
previous screen.
3. Select the item appropriate for the card used in the server and press the [Enter]
key.
• For a RAID card
LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)
• For an onboard SCSI controller card
LSI Logic PCI SCSI/FC MPI Miniport Driver
4. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
The driver you provided seems to be newer than the Win-
dows default driver.
5. Follow the instructions in the window to perform installation.
When a message prompting you to insert a floppy disk appears, insert the proper
driver disk and press the [Enter] key.
5
When a Fiber Channel Controller (PG-FC106) is installed, install the fiber
channel card driver.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows,
including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the fiber channel card driver disk
created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use with
Windows, using a device support disk provided by an
adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list,
or press ESC to returnto the
previous screen.
3. Select the following item and press the [Enter] key.
Emulex LP9802 PCI-Fiber Channel HBA
120
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
The driver you provided seems to be newer than the
Windows default driver.
6
7
Follow the instructions from the setup program to continue the installation
procedure.
If a message indicating that the driver has failed in the Windows logo test for validating the
compatibility with Windows appears, select [Yes] to continue the installation procedure.
Install the chipset driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Execute the following command on the ServerStart CD-ROM.
[CD-ROM drive] :\DRIVERS\ChipSet\Intel\infinst_autol.exe
The installation wizard starts up.
3. Click [Next]. Follow instructions in the window to perform installation.
4. When the "InstallShield(R) wizard has completed." message appears, eject the
ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click [Finish] to restart the
system.
4
8
9
Install the LAN driver.
Install the LAN driver using the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For more
Install the SAF-TE driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
3. Click [Device Manager].
4. Double-click [TOSHIBA SAF-TE SCSI Processor Device] under [System devices].
The properties window appears.
5. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver].
The "Device Driver Upgrade Wizard" window appears.
6. Click [Next].
7. Select [Find an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
8. Select only [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
9. Select [Install another driver] and click [Next].
10. Select [FSC SCSI Termination Module] and click [Next].
Installation starts. When it is completed, a completion message appears.
11. Click [Finish].
12. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
121
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
10 Installing high reliability tools.
install high reliability tools. When a RAID card is used, RAID Management Tool (Global Array
Manager) also install at the same time. When manually installing RAID Management Tool, refer
The installation of Windows Server 2003 has completed.
● Before Starting Operation
After OS installation, refer to "Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool" (ꢀpg.167) and perform the necessary
procedures.
4.2.2 Installing Windows 2000 Server
1
Create driver disks.
Prepare necessary drivers before installing Windows 2000 Server.
Some drivers used with Windows 2000 Server are created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For
2
Insert the Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM.
Turn on the server and insert the Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM immediately into the CD-ROM
drive. Check there are no floppy disks in the floppy disk drive. When the active area is specified
on the hard disk, the following message appears.
Press any key to boot from CD....
Pressing any key while this message is displayed boots the system from the CD-ROM.
3
The [Windows 2000 Server Setup] window appears.
Immediately, the following message appears at the bottom of the window. Press the [F6] key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID
driver ...
ꢁ
This message will be displayed for a short time after the setup window (blue screen) appears.
Press the [F6] key immediately after the window turns blue.
4
Install the drivers manually.
1. When the following message appears, press the [S] key.
To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives,
or special disk controllers for use with Windows 2000,
including those for which you have a device
support disk from a mass storage device
manufacturer, press S.
122
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2. When the "Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support
disk into Drive A:" message appears, insert the driver disk created from the
ServerStart CD-ROM and press the [Enter] key.
The following message appears.
You have chosen to configure a SCSI Adapter for use
with Windows 2000, using a device support disk
provided by an adapter manufacturer.
Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following
list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen.
3. Select the item appropriate for the card used in the server and press the [Enter]
key.
• For a RAID card
LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2000
• For an onboard SCSI controller card
LSI Logic PCI SCSI/FC MPI Miniport Driver
4. Follow instructions in the window to perform installation.
When a message prompting you to insert a floppy disk appears, insert the proper
driver disk and press the [Enter] key.
4
ꢁ
Repeat these procedures to install a driver for another card.
5
6
Follow the instructions from the setup program to continue the installation
procedures.
Cautions on Restarting
ꢁ
In the course of installation, a message appears to indicate that the setup program restarts.
Wait until it restarts automatically.
Install the chipset driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Execute the following command on the ServerStart CD-ROM.
[CD-ROM drive] :\DRIVERS\ChipSet\Intel\infinst_autol.exe
The installation wizard starts up.
3. Click [Next]. Follow instructions in the window to perform installation.
4. When the "InstallShield(R) wizard has completed." message appears, eject the
ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and click [Finish] to restart the
system.
7
Install the LAN driver.
Install the LAN driver using the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM. For more
123
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
8
Install the SAF-TE driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
3. Click [Device Manager] from the displayed list.
4. Double-click [TOSHIBA SAF-TE SCSI Processor Device] under [System devices].
The properties window appears.
5. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver].
The "Device Driver Upgrade Wizard" window appears.
6. Click [Next].
7. Select [Find an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
8. Select only [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
9. Select [Install another driver] and click [Next].
10. Select [FSC SCSI Termination Module] and click [Next].
Installation starts. When it is completed, a completion message appears.
11. Click [Finish].
12. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
9
Install the USB 2.0 driver.
The procedure differs depending on whether Service Pack 4 is applied to the CD-ROM for the
OS used.
When Service Pack 4 is applied
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
3. Click [Device Manager] from the displayed list.
4. Double-click [USB 2.0 Root Hub] under [Universal Serial Bus (USB) controller].
The properties window appears.
5. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver].
The "Device Driver Upgrade Wizard" window appears.
6. Click [Next].
7. Select [Find an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
8. Select only [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
9. Select [Install another driver] and click [Next].
10. Select [USB 2.0 Root Hub] and click [Next].
Installation starts. When it is completed, a completion message appears.
11. Click [Finish].
12. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
124
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
When Service Pack 4 is not applied
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
3. Click [Device Manager] from the displayed list.
4. Double-click [Universal Serial Bus (USB) controller] under [Other devices].
The properties window appears.
5. Click [Reinstall Driver] in the [General] tab window.
The "Device Driver Upgrade Wizard" window appears.
6. Click [Next].
7. Select [Install an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The [Identify Driver File] window appears.
8. Check [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
Detected drivers are displayed.
9. Click [Next].
Driver installation starts. When it is completed, a completion window appears.
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
4
10 Install the display driver.
1. Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the drive of the server.
When the ServerStart window appears, exit ServerStart.
2. Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and click [Manage] from the
displayed menu.
3. Click [Device Manager] from the displayed list.
4. Double-click [ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI] under [Display Adapter].
The properties window appears.
5. Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver].
The [Start Device Driver Upgrade] window appears.
6. Click [Next].
The [Install Hardware Device Driver] window appears.
7. Select [Find an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The [Identify Driver File] window appears.
8. Select [CD-ROM drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
9. When a message indicating that the driver has been found appears in the [Find
Driver File] window, click [Next].
When the installation is completed, a completion message appears.
10. Click [Finish].
11. Click [Close] to close the properties window.
12. Eject the ServerStart CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive and restart the system to
make the settings effective.
11 After driver installation, apply Windows 2000 Service Pack.
For details, refer to the description in the window.
125
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
12 Installing high reliability tools.
install high reliability tools. When a RAID card is used, RAID Management Tool (Global Array
Manager) also install at the same time. When manually installing RAID Management Tool, refer
The installation of Windows 2000 Server has completed.
● Before Starting Operation
After OS installation, refer to "Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool" (ꢀpg.167) and perform the necessary
procedures.
4.2.3 Installing Linux
For the use of Linux, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
126
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4.3 Installing the LAN Driver
This section explains the procedure for installing the driver.
In addition to the case where the OS is installed manually, the driver must be installed
when a LAN card is added.
4.3.1 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows Server 2003)
The LAN driver installation procedure differs depending on whether the network adapter was
recognized during the OS installation.
ꢁ
For the following LAN cards, the network adapter is recognized when the card is mounted during OS
installation.
• PG-1852
• PG-1862
4
1
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
2
Click [Device Manager].
On the Device Manager list, check if a recognized network adapter is present.
(Window example)
Recognized
network adapter
Unrecognized
network adapter
When a recognized network adapter is present, [Network adapters] appears.
•
When a recognized network adapter is present
127
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
•
When a recognized network adapter is not present
When the LAN driver is installed to [Other devices] before updating the driver for the network
adapter recognized immediately after the OS installation
ꢁ
When driver installation starts, the following window appears.
Clicking [Finish] displays the [Help and Support Center] window. Click [X] to close the window.
After installation, the "!" mark is displayed at the LAN device name in Device Manager. Device names
are displayed properly when all LAN drivers are installed and the system is restarted.
■ Updating LAN Drivers
Perform the following procedures on all LAN device names under [Network adapters] in [Device
Manager].
1
Double-click a LAN device name under [Network adapters].
ꢁ
Names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN cards
PG-1852
PG-1862
LAN device name
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
2
3
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
Click [Update Driver] in the [Driver] tab window.
The "Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard" window appears.
4
5
Select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The driver will be installed.
Click [Finish].
128
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Click [Close] to close the properties window.
■ Installing the LAN Driver
Perform the following procedures on each [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices] in [Device
Manager].
1
2
3
4
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
For the onboard LAN, insert the ServerStart CD-ROM.
Double-click [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices].
The properties window for the Ethernet controller appears.
Click [Reinstall Driver] in the [General] tab window.
The [Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard] window appears.
Select [Install the software automatically (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The driver will be installed.
4
5
6
7
Click [Finish].
Click [Close] to close the properties window.
Remove the driver disk and restart the system.
ꢁ
After LAN driver installation, names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN cards
Onboard LAN (1000BASE-T)
PG-1852
LAN device name
Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX)
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter
PG-1862
PG-1882
PG-1892
129
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
4.3.2 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows 2000 Server)
1
2
3
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server.
For the onboard LAN, insert the ServerStart CD-ROM.
Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop and select [Manage] from
the displayed menu.
Click [Device Manager].
As many [Ethernet controller] items as the installed LAN ports are displayed under [Other
devices].
Double-click each [Ethernet controller] item and perform the following Steps 4 to 11 on all LAN
ports.
4
5
Double-click [Ethernet controller] under [Other devices].
The properties window for the Ethernet controller appears.
Click [Reinstall Driver] in the [General] tab window.
The [Device Driver Upgrade Wizard] window appears.
6
7
Click [Next].
Select [Install an optimum driver (Recommended)] and click [Next].
The [Identify Driver File] window appears.
8
9
Select [Floppy disk drive] in [Search location options] and click [Next].
Detected drivers are displayed.
Click [Next].
Driver installation starts. When it is completed, a completion window appears.
10 Click [Finish].
11 Click [Close] to close the properties window.
ꢁ
When [Ethernet controller] items are displayed under [Other devices], perform the above Steps
4 to 11 on all [Ethernet controller] items.
12 Remove the driver disk and restart the system.
130
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
ꢁ
After LAN driver installation, names of the LAN devices are displayed as follows.
table: LAN device name
LAN device name
LAN cards
Onboard LAN (1000BASE-T)
PG-1852
Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX)
Intel(R) PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter
PG-1862
PG-1882
PG-1892
■ When a LAN Card is Added
The following window may appear at system startup after addition of a LAN card. Perform the
appropriate procedure according to the displayed window.
•
•
When the "New Hardware Detection Wizard" window appears
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and perform Step 6 and subsequent steps
in "Updating LAN Drivers".
When the [Insert Disk] window prompts you to insert the "Intel PRO Adapter CD-ROM or floppy
4
®
disk" or "Intel PRO/1000 Disk Driver".
Insert the driver disk created from the ServerStart CD-ROM and install the driver.
ꢁ
The "Digital signature was not found" message may appear. If it appears, click [Yes] to continue the
operations.
ꢁ
When the [Overwriting the Files] window appears, normally do not overwrite the files (select [Do not
overwrite all files]).
4.3.3 Latest Drivers
131
Chapter 4 Manual OS Installation
132
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.1 Memory Dump/Paging File
Setting
Before start operating this server, configure the setting for obtaining memory dump.
The setting procedure varies between Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000
Server.
● Memory Dump
If memory dump is set, debugging information will be automatically saved when a STOP error (fatal
system error) occurs in the system. Using the saved memory dump, error cause can be analyzed.
If the amount of installed memory is large, pay special attention when setting the memory dump file.
The settings for obtaining memory dump should be configured after installing the files to be used for
operations (OS, applications, etc.).
5.1.1 How to Obtain Memory Dump For
Windows Server 2003
Check the following settings before starting configuration to obtain memory dump.
■ Checking Hard Disk Free Space
To obtain memory dump, sufficient hard disk capacity is required for creating paging files and memory
dump files.
The obtainable dump types and required hard disk capacity are as follows:
● Complete Memory (Full) Dump
When the system unexpectedly stops, contents of the whole system memory are recorded. The file is
stored in the directory displayed in the [Dump file] box.
•
•
Paging file: Installed physical memory + 11MB (Recommended: Installed physical memory x 1.5)
Memory dump file: Same amount as installed physical memory
● Kernel Memory Dump
Information of only kernel memory space is recorded. The file is stored in the directory displayed in the
[Dump file] box. Capacity required for kernel memory dump is as follows:
•
Paging file: Depending on installed physical memory amount
For memory of 256 to 1,373MB - Installed physical memory x 1.5
For memory of 1,374MB or more - 32-bit system: 2GB + 16MB, 64-bit system: RAM size + 128MB
Memory dump file: Depending on the used amount of kernel-mode address space during STOP
•
134
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Small Memory Dump
Minimum amount of useful information for problem identification is recorded. If this option is specified,
a new file is created each time the system unexpectedly stops.
History of such files is stored in the directory displayed in [Small dump directory].
•
•
Paging file: 2MB or more
Memory dump file: 64KB or 128KB
■ Memory Dump File Setting
Set up the memory dump file according to the following procedures:
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the memory dump file is to be stored.
(ꢀpg.134).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [System].
The [System Properties] window appears.
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Settings] in [Startup and Recovery].
The [Startup and Recovery] window appears.
5
135
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5
Set as follows:
1. In the [Write debugging information] section, select the memory dump file type.
• Small memory dump (64KB)
Minimum information is recorded to the memory dump file.
Each time a fatal error occurs, a new file is created in the directory specified in [Small
dump directory].
• Kernel memory dump
Only kernel memory is recorded to the memory dump file.
• Complete memory dump (Recommended)
The whole system memory information is recorded to the memory dump file.
2. In [Dump file] or [Small dump directory], specify the directory to save the memory
dump file, with its full path.
In case of kernel memory dump or complete memory dump, if [Overwrite any existing file]
is checked, debugging information is overwritten to the specified file every time.
6
7
8
Click [OK] to close the [Startup and Recovery] window.
Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
■ Paging File Setting
Set up the paging file according to the following procedures:
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the system is installed.
(ꢀpg.134).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [System].
The [System Properties] window appears.
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Settings] in [Performance].
The [Performance Options] window appears.
136
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
6
7
Click the [Advanced] tab.
Click [Change] in the [Virtual memory] section.
The [Virtual Memory] window appears.
5
Specify the drive where the paging file is to be created.
In [Drive], select the drive where the system is installed.
The selected drive is displayed in [Drive] in [Paging file size for selected drive].
137
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
8
Select [Custom size] and enter a value in [Initial size].
The value depends on the type of the set dump file.
Specify a value larger than the value shown in [Recommended] in [Total paging file size for all
drives].
ꢁ
When a smaller value is specified for the paging file size, performance may be affected. For
maximum system efficiency, be sure to set [Initial size] with a value larger than the [Recom-
mended] size described in [Total paging file size for all drives]. The recommended size is total
memory installed in the system x 1.5. However, if a program consuming a large amount of
memory is regularly used, set a larger size as required.
9
Enter a value in [Maximum size].
Specify a value larger than the [Initial size].
10 Save the settings.
Click [Set] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] section.
The settings are saved, and the value specified is displayed in [Paging File Size] of [Drive].
11 Click [OK] to close the [Virtual Memory] window.
12 Click [OK] to close the [Performance Options] window.
13 Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
14 Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
5.1.2 How to Obtain Memory Dump For
Windows 2000 Server
Check the following settings before starting configuration to obtain memory dump.
■ Checking Hard Disk Free Space
Once memory dump is obtained, a file containing contents of the whole physical memory installed in the
system is created. Before storing the dump file, confirm that there is sufficient free space in the hard
disk.
The obtainable dump types and required hard disk capacity are as follows:
● Complete Memory (Full) Dump
When the system unexpectedly stops, contents of the whole system memory are recorded. If this option
is selected, space to retain the paging file as large as the whole physical memory × 1.3 is required in the
boot volume.
•
Included information
Common header, all virtual address pages that are not paged out during STOP
138
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
•
Required size
Installed physical memory × 1.3
● Kernel Memory Dump
Information of only kernel memory space is recorded. When the system unexpectedly stops, the process
that records information to the log file is speeded up. According to the amount of memory installed in
the server, available area of 50 to 800MB is required for the paging file in the boot volume.
•
Included information
Common header, summary dump header (complete memory dump) - (user process space page) -
(cache region page) - (unused pool region page)
Required size
•
Depending on the used amount of kernel-mode address space during STOP
● Small Memory Dump
Minimum amount of useful information for problem identification is recorded. In this option, a paging
file of at least 2MB is required in the boot volume. Also, a new file is created each time the system
unexpectedly stops.
History of such files is stored in the directory displayed in [Small dump directory] (usually,
C:\winnt\minidump).
•
Included information
Common header, minidump header, kernel module, memory information, processor information,
process information, thread information, stuck page, unloaded module information
5
•
Required size
2MB or more
■ Memory Dump File Setting
Set up the memory dump file according to the following procedures:
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the memory dump file is to be stored.
(ꢀpg.138).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click the [System] icon.
The [System Properties] window appears.
139
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Startup and Recovery].
The [Startup and Recovery] window appears.
6
Set as follows:
1. In the [Write debugging information] section, select the memory dump file type.
• Small memory dump (2MB or more)
Minimum information is recorded to the memory dump file.
Each time a fatal error occurs, a new file is created in the directory specified in [Small
dump directory].
• Kernel memory dump
Only kernel memory is recorded to the memory dump file.
• Complete memory dump (Recommended)
The whole system memory information is recorded to the memory dump file.
2. In [Dump file] or [Small dump directory], specify the directory to save the memory
dump file, with its full path.
In case of kernel memory dump or complete memory dump, if [Overwrite any existing file]
is checked, debugging information is overwritten to the specified file every time.
7
8
9
Click [OK] to close the [Startup and Recovery] window.
Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
140
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Paging File Setting
Set up the paging file according to the following procedures:
1
2
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
Check free space of the drive where the system is installed.
(ꢀpg.277).
3
4
Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
Double-click the [System] icon.
The [System Properties] window appears.
5
Click the [Advanced] tab and click [Performance Options].
The [Performance Options] window appears.
5
141
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
6
Click [Change] in the [Virtual memory] section.
The [Virtual Memory] window appears.
7
8
Specify the drive where the paging file is to be created.
In [Drive], select the drive where the system is installed.
The selected drive is displayed in [Drive] in [Paging file size for selected drive].
Specify the [Initial size].
The value depends on the type of the set dump file.
Specify a value larger than the value shown in [Recommended] in [Total paging file size for all
drives].
ꢁ
When a smaller value is specified for the paging file size, performance may be affected. We
recommend to specify the paging file size larger than the recommended value.
9
Specify the [Maximum size].
Specify a value larger than the [Initial size].
10 Save the settings.
Click [Set] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] section.
The settings are saved, and the value specified is displayed in [Paging File Size] of [Drive].
11 Click [OK] to close the [Virtual Memory] window.
12 Click [OK] to close the [Performance Options] window.
13 Click [OK] to close the [System Properties] window.
14 Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
142
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.2 Creating a Disk for System
Recovery
If the installation of the OS was performed manually, create a system recovery disk.
ꢁ
ꢁ
If the system file, system configuration or environment setting change at startup, etc., are damaged,
such data can be reconstructed using the recovery information stored in the created system recovery
disk.
To create a recovery disk, you need an unused formatted floppy disk. Prepare it in advance.
5.2.1 Creating the Automated System Recovery (ASR) Set
For Windows Server 2003
After setting up Windows Server 2003, create a system recovery set. To do this, you need an unused
formatted floppy disk and a medium to store back up files.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Click [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [System Tool] → [Backup].
The [Backup or Recovery Wizard] window appears.
5
Click [Next].
The [Backup or Recovery] window appears.
Select [Create a backup of files and settings], and then click [Next].
The [Items to Create Backups] window appears
Select [All the information in this computer], and then click [Next].
The [Backup Type, Destination and Name of the Backup File] window appears.
Specify name and destination of the backup file, and then click [Next].
The [Backup or Recovery Wizard Complete] window appears.
Click [Finish].
Backup process starts.
If a message prompting you to insert a floppy disk appears, insert the floppy
disk and click [OK].
Automated system recovery disk is created.
143
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
8
When the process is completed, a message appears. Eject the floppy disk
according to the message and put a label on it.
Label Example: "Windows Automated System Recovery Disk: Backup.bkf, Created at 12:00 04/
01/2003"
9
Click [OK] to exit [Backup Utility].
10 Click [Close] to close the [Backup Progress] window.
An automated system recovery set has been created.
Store the automated system recovery set just created in a secure location.
5.2.2 Creating a System Recovery Disk
For Windows 2000 Server
After setting up Windows Server 2000, create a system recovery disk. To do this, you need an unused
formatted floppy disk.
1
2
3
Put a label showing "Windows 2000 system recovery disk" onto a floppy disk
and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [System Tools] → [Backup].
The backup window appears.
Click the [Wizard] tab and click [System Recovery Disk].
Create a system recovery disk by following the window instructions.
144
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.3 Storing the System Configuration
Information
Before starting operations, store the configuration information of the BIOS setup
utility. By storing this information, the system can be recovered with the stored
information in case of a system failure (such as when the information is deleted due
to the drain of the built-in battery). Use Server Management Tools for storing and
recovering the system configuration information.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Since the system configuration information is significant in maintaining the server, be sure to store the
BIOS information after the following operations:
• When the information is changed with the BIOS setup utility
• When the hardware configuration of this server is changed (e.g. CPU, memory, baseboard or
expansion card is added/removed or changed)
As the stored system configuration information will be used during maintenance, etc., send it to your
maintenance personnel.
■ Preparation for Using Server Management Tools
Before using Server Management Tools, prepare the "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with the
server at hand.
5
■ Cautions
•
Server Management Tools are for this server only. Do not use those tools on other systems.
Otherwise, the system may be corrupted.
•
Only the information that is configured with the BIOS setup utility can be stored/recovered with
Server Management Tools. The BIOS information in internal SCSI devices or expansion cards
cannot be stored/recovered.
•
Make sure to start up the server with the "Server Management Tools" disk before running Server
Management Tools. Do not run Server Management Tools on the server started from the hard disk or
by the other floppy disks. Otherwise, the system may be corrupted.
•
•
Do not eject a floppy disk while the floppy disk access LED is on. Such an action may lead not only
to corruption of the floppy disk data but also an unstable state of the system.
If an error message appears while running Server Management Tools, respond to the message
145
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.3.1 How to Store the BIOS Information
Store the BIOS information according to the following procedures.
ꢁ
Before starting the operation, if the "OS Boot Monitoring" function of ServerView is enabled, disable it
(it is disabled by default).
If you start up the system while the "OS Boot Monitoring" function remains effective, the operation of
the server may become unpredictable at such times as an abrupt power interruption or restart.
If it is necessary to operate the server with the "OS Boot Monitoring" function enabled, enable the
function after storing the BIOS information.
For details of ServerView, refer to "ServerView User’s Guide".
ꢁ
You cannot save the set values of the BIOS setup utility in the following location. Write them down
beforehand.
• Information under [Main] menu → [Boot Option] submenu → [Boot Sequence]
1
Turn on the server and insert the "Server Management Tools" disk into the
floppy disk drive.
2
When the DOS promptwindow appears, enter the following command and
press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>biossave.bat
ꢁ
If storing has already been performed with Server Management Tools, the stored file must exist
in the floppy disk. In this case, overwriting the file may lead to incompletion of BIOS information
recovery. Move the file to another floppy disk, rename the file or delete, or it by executing the
following command.
A:\SMTOOL\>deldat.bat [Enter]
3
If the BIOS information is stored correctly, the following message appears.
Success!
Storing procedure is completed. The server can now be turned off safely.
146
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.3.2 How to Recover the BIOS Information
If the information configured with the BIOS setup utility was deleted due to a drain of the built-in server
battery, etc., restore the BIOS information according to the following procedures.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Do not turn off the server during a program run.
Before starting up the system by inserting the "Server Management Tools" disk, check that the "OS
Boot Monitoring" function of ServerView is disabled (it is disabled by default).
If you start up the system while the "OS Boot Monitoring" function remains effective, the operation of
the server may become unpredictable at such times as an abrupt power interruption or restart. If the
server is operated with the "OS Boot Monitoring" function enabled, enable the function again before
resuming operation. For details of ServerView, refer to "ServerView User’s Guide".
1
Turn on the server and insert the "Server Management Tools" disk into the
floppy disk drive.
2
When the DOS prompt window appears, enter the following command and
press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>biosrest.bat
3
4
If the BIOS information is restored correctly, the following message appears.
Success!
5
The BIOS information will be enabled after the next system restart. Restart the
server.
Perform Step 1 to display the DOS prompt window. The restoration procedure has been
completed. The server can now be turned off safely.
147
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.4 Creating Maintenance Tools
This section explains how to create tools for maintaining the server.
Maintenance tools are created with the FloppyBuilder function of ServerStart.
With the FloppyBuilder function of ServerStart, you can create the following tools:
•
•
DOS floppy disks
Hardware Configuration Tools (such as Server Management Tools)
The FfloppyBuilder can be used under environments such as:
•
•
the ServerStart system started on a client computer (recommended)
the system started on the server using the ServerStart CD-ROM
ꢁ
When creating the tools on a client computer, it is necessary to install ServerStart on the client
computer beforehand. Install it according to "2.4 Preparation for Using ServerStart on a Client
Computer" (ꢀpg.54).
If ServerStart of a different version is installed in the computer, make sure to uninstall the ServerStart.
Then perform installation again. For details on how to uninstall ServerStart, refer to "2.4.2 Uninstalling
ServerStart" (ꢀpg.57).
ꢁ
The FloppyBuilder function may not operate correctly if you start up ServerStart while ServerStart of a
different version is installed in the computer. Make sure to uninstall a different version of ServerStart.
5.4.1 Creating a DOS Floppy Disk
For DOS data stored into the floppy disk, refer to the file in the following folder of the ServerStart CD-
ROM.
[CD-ROM drive] :\FreeDOS
To create a DOS floppy disk, you need an unused floppy disk. Prepare it in advance.
If ServerStart has already been started, it is not necessary to restart it. If it has not, start it up according to
the following procedures:
148
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Starting ServerStart
● When Creating a DOS Floppy Disk on a Client Computer
For Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP Professional, and if the contents
of the ServerStart CD-ROM has been copied to the computer
1
Click [Start] → [Programs] → [Fujitsu ServerStart] → [ServerStart].
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
For Windows NT, or if the ServerStart CD-ROM has not been copied to the
computer
1
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM into the client computer's CD-ROM drive.
ServerStart starts up and the [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
5
● When Creating a DOS Floppy Disk on the Server
1
Turn on the server and insert the ServerStart CD-ROM immediately after that.
ServerStart starts up and a message appears prompting you to insert the ServerStart floppy disk.
2
Insert the attached "ServerStart floppy disk" into the server's floppy disk drive.
Then make sure "Removable media" and "A:" are selected and click [Create].
A network setup window for remote installation appears.
ꢀ
If a configuration file already exists in the ServerStart floppy disk and [OK] is clicked without
clicking [Create], the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window appears. Make sure to click
[Exit]. The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
If [Start] is clicked in the [ServerStart Unattended Mode] window, the installation of the server
will start and all disk contents will be deleted.
149
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
3
Click [OK].
The [Initializing ServerStart] window appears and unattended installation will be started.
Depending on the hardware configuration, this process may take a few minutes. When the
process is completed, the [Create a ServerStart Floppy Disk] window appears.
4
Click [or Insert a ServerStart Floppy Disk to Start ServerStart].
The [Welcome to ServerStart] window appears.
5
Eject the ServerStart floppy disk.
150
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Creating a DOS Floppy Disk
Start up ServerStart and confirm that the [Welcome to ServerStart] window is displayed.
1
Click [FloppyBuilder].
The [ServerStart FloppyBuilder] window appears.
2
3
Click [DOS Diskette].
Insert the prepared floppy disk by following the message.
5
Perform the subsequent operations according to the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The DOS floppy disk will be created automatically.
When a message appears indicating that the disk is created, click [OK] and eject the disk.
5.4.2 Creating a Hardware Configuration Tool
This section explains how to create a Hardware Configuration Tool from the ServerStart CD-ROM.
Prepare floppy disks as many as the tools you want to create beforehand.
Types of a Hardware Configuration Tool vary by model.
1
Start up ServerStart and click [FloppyBuilder].
2
3
Click [Hardware Configuration Tools].
Click the tool you want to create.
Insert the prepared floppy disk by following the message.
151
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
4
Perform the subsequent operations according to the messages on the window.
The floppy disk will be formatted automatically and file copying will start.
The respective tools will be created automatically. When a message appears indicating that the
disk is created, click [OK] and eject the disk.
152
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.5 Notes Before Operating the
Server
This section explains the settings required before starting to operate the server.
For the respective settings, refer to "First Step Guide".
•
•
When connecting a SCSI optional device (such as a hard disk cabinet or DAT), connect it according
•
For the settings for the installed applications supplied with the product, refer to the manuals of each
application.
5.5.1 Updating the System
■ Windows Update
The system being used must be updated to prevent potential problems in the system.
Executing Windows Update can automatically search the latest version of QFE applicable to the OS and
update the system to the latest status. Execute Windows Update periodically.
Executing Windows Update requires a network environment connectable to the Internet.
5
153
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.5.2 Auto-run Function from CD-ROM Drives
Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the auto-run function from the CD-ROM
drives after server installation:
1
2
Make the registry editable, and change the value of AutoRun of the following
registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\CDRom
To enable auto-run, set the value of Autorun to "1", and to disable auto-run, set the value to "0".
Restart the system.
The setting is enabled after the system is restarted.
5.5.3 Drive Letter Assignment in Expert Mode
In expert mode, you cannot specify a drive letter to a particular partition arbitrarily. Drive letters
specified with Disk Manager in expert mode will be sequentially assigned from the first partition with
"C, D, E..." when installation is completed, and an unused drive letter will be assigned to the CD-ROM
drive.
To change the drive letter, perform the following procedures after installation.
ꢀ
You cannot change the drive letters for the system and boot drive.
■ For Windows Server 2003
1
2
3
Click [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Click [Disk Management].
Right-click the partition to change the letter and click [Change Drive Letter and
Path].
The [Change Drive Letter and Path] window appears.
4
5
Click [Edit].
The [Change Drive Letter or Path] window appears.
Change the drive letter.
■ For Windows 2000 Server
1
2
Right-click [My Computer] icon on the desktop and select [Manage].
Click [Disk Management].
154
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Right-click the partition to change the letter and select [Change Drive Letter
and Path].
The [Change Drive Letter and Path] window appears.
4
5
Click [Edit].
The [Change Drive Letter or Path] window appears.
Change the drive letter.
5.5.4 Notes on Advanced Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS)
Note the following points when using an advanced uninterruptible power supply (referred to as UPS
afterward).
■ UPS Shutdown Time Setting
Specify enough time for the UPS power-off time (time from the shutdown direction to the actual power-
off). If this time is set insufficiently, the power will be cut off before system shutdown, which may result
in destruction of data. For more details, refer to the manuals for UPS and UPS management software.
■ Power Supply Control by UPS
5
Change BIOS settings as follows to power the server on automatically using the UPS management
software (PowerChute Network Shutdown, PowerChute Business Edition) at power recovery or during
scheduled operation. For details on how to set the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to "8.2 BIOS Setup Utility"
(ꢁpg.231).
1
2
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
From the [Advanced] menu, select the [Power On/Off] submenu and press the
[Enter] key.
The [Power On/Off] submenu window appears.
3
Set the [Power Failure Recovery] to [Always On].
5.5.5 Turning the Power On via a LAN
You can turn the power on the server from a client (via a LAN) by utilizing the Wakeup on LAN (WOL)
function.
ꢀ
Be sure to install ServerView to control the power supply via a LAN.
155
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
ꢀ
ꢀ
When the power cable is disconnected from the server or the server is powered off due to power
interruption, restart the server. Unless the server is restarted, the WOL function will be disabled.
Only the onboard LAN supports the WOL function on this server. Make sure you connect the onboard
LAN to a control power supply via a LAN.
■ BIOS Setup Utility Setting
When power management is performed via a LAN, configure the settings as follows using the BIOS
Setup Utility. This is set to "Enabled" by default.
1
2
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
From the [Advanced] menu, select the [Power On/Off] submenu and press the
[Enter] key.
The [Power On/Off] submenu window appears.
3
Set [Power On Source: LAN] to [Enabled].
ꢀ
5.5.6 Other Notes on Operation
■ Unnecessary Files
After OS installation is completed, folders named Runonce and Runonce 2 may be left in the drive
where the OS is installed. Delete these folders since you do not need them for the system operation.
■ Notes on 24-hour Operation
● Automated System Operation
To provide an extra margin of safety against unintentional damage, introduce disaster-prevention
measures in the office and keep disaster prevention personnel (such as a security guard or janitor) in the
building.
● Unintentional Power-off Prevention
We recommend the installation of a special power supply device (such as a distribution board) to prevent
unplanned power shut-offs.
156
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.6 LAN Driver Advanced Setup
[BACS]
BACS is an integrated GUI application consisting of programs such as BASP
(Broadcom Advanced Server Program) that provides the load balancing feature, etc.,
by teaming up multiple adapters. BACS is used in the following situations:
• Setup a VLAN using the onboard LAN
• Perform the other advanced setups of the onboard LAN
Use of Intel® PROSet
ꢀ
• Use the Teaming function between LAN cards or between a LAN card and the onboard LAN
• Setup a VLAN using a LAN card
• Use the Jumbo frame with a LAN card
• Perform the other advanced setups of a LAN card
5.6.1 BACS Installation
5
If the OS was installed using ServerStart, "BACS" is already installed with the driver. If the OS was
installed manually, BACS will not be installed.
If [Broadcom Control Suite] is not displayed in the [Control Panel], install BACS according to the
following installation procedures:
1
Start the following EXE file contained in the ServerStart CD-ROM.
[CD-ROM drive]: \PROGRAMS\GENERAL\Broadcom\MAforS2\setup.exe
The installer starts up.
157
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
2
The installer starts up. Proceed the installation by following the window
instructions.
When the window below appears during the installation procedure, check [BASP] and click
[Next].
5.6.2 VLAN Setup Procedure
1
Start up BACS. The procedure differs depending on the OS being used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Broadcom Control Suite 2].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Broadcom Control Suite 2".
2
Right-click a LAN adapter or the Team name of a Teamed Up adapter and click
[Add VLAN] from the displayed menu.
ꢀ
ꢀ
A LAN adapter is displayed with a mark.
The Team name of a Teamed Up adapter is displayed with a
mark.
158
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3
Specify [VLAN ID] and [VLAN Name] in the [Add VLAN] window.
The [VLAN ID] should be identical with the switch setting.
The [VLAN Name] does not need to be identical with the switch setting.
ꢀ
You cannot use a "VLAN ID" or "VLAN Name" that has already been used. Enter another set
value.
4
5
When the setting for the team is completed, click [OK].
Click [Apply] to apply the settings.
5
After the network is temporarily disconnected, a window is displayed. Click [Yes (Y)].
159
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.7 LAN Driver Advanced Setup
[Intel® PROSet]
®
"Intel PROSet" is a tool for configuring details on the LAN driver. This is used in the
following cases.
• Use the Teaming function between LAN cards or between a LAN card and the
onboard LAN
• Setup a VLAN using a LAN card
• Use the Jumbo frame with a LAN card
• Perform the other advanced setups of a LAN card
Use of BACS
ꢀ
• Setup a VLAN using the onboard LAN
• Perform the other advanced setups of the onboard LAN
5.7.1 Intel® PROSet Installation
®
If the OS is installed using ServerStart, Intel PROSet is already installed with the driver. If the OS is
®
installed manually, Intel PROSet will not be installed.
®
On Windows Server 2003/Windows 2000 Server, if [Intel PROSet] is not displayed in the [Control
®
Panel], install Intel PROSet according to the following installation procedures:
1
2
Start the following EXE file contained in the ServerStart CD-ROM.
For Windows Server 2003
[CD-ROM drive]: \Tools\GENERAL\Intel\ProsetW2k3\Proset.exe
For Windows 2000 Server
[CD-ROM drive]: \Tools\GENERAL\Intel\ProsetW2k\Proset.exe
Select [Automatic execution-runs setup immediately] and click [OK].
Perform the subsequent procedures by following the instructions.
160
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.7.2 Notes on Referring to the Intel® PROSet Help Topics
When referring to help topics, note the following points.
•
•
•
Do not use the driver downloaded from the Intel Corporation online service page on this server.
If the descriptions in the help and this manual vary, give priority to this manual.
The name of LAN cards appears in the help texts corresponds to the cards as follows:
table: LAN cards appear in the help texts
LAN cards appear in the help text
PRO/1000 Desktop
Corresponding LAN cards
PG-1852
PRO/1000 Server
PG-1862/PG-1882/PG-1892
PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1882/PG-1892
PG-1852/PG-1862/PG-1892
PG-1882
PRO/1000 adapter
PRO/1000 Copper adapter
PRO/1000 Fiber adapter
82540-based adapter
PG-1852
•
The controllers of the onboard LAN and LAN cards are as follows:
table: Controller being used
LAN cards
Controller being used
Intel® 82540EM
PG-1852
PG-1862
Intel® 82546EB
Intel® 82545GM
PG-1882/PG-1892
5
5.7.3 Cautions for PG-1852/1862/188x/189xLAN Driver V8.3
■ Event Log
Once a Team is setup, multiple identical logs from the same source that starts with the following log may
be stored in the system log file of the event viewer at system start-up.
Source
ID
iANSMiniport
11
Type
Warning
Description
The following adapter link is not connected: (adapter name)
* (adapter name) varies depending on the OS or hardware configuration.
Since such event logs will be stored nonetheless even if the Teaming function is operated normally,
ignore them.
161
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
5.7.4 Teaming Function
■ Notes
When using the Teaming function, note the following points.
•
•
You require Service Pack 2 or later for Windows 2000 Server.
For AFT/ALB/FEC/GEC type, you can incorporate up to four LAN ports into one team and two ports
for a SFT type team.
®
•
Once a Team is created, virtual adapters (Intel Advanced Network Service Virtual Adapter) will be
created in the [Device Manager] and/or [Network and Dial-up Connections] of the system. Do not
disable or delete this virtual adapter from the [Device Manager] or [Network and Dial-up
®
Connections]. When deleting a virtual adapter, make sure to use "Intel PROSet".
•
When the Teaming function is being used, you can only use the following protocols:
• For AFT/SFT/FEC/GEC type: IP, NetBEUI, IPX (NCP), IPX (NetBIOS)
• For ALB type: IP, IPX (NCP)
•
•
When the Teaming function is being used, you cannot use the hardware assist function of IPSEC. Do
not use this function even if the function is installed in all cards in the team.
When the Teaming function is being used, you cannot use Windows Load Balancing Service
(WLBS) and Network Load Balancing (NLB).
•
•
•
•
PG-1852 does not become a member of a Team.
You can not select FEC/GEC type when Teaming Up the onboard LAN and a LAN card.
If FEC/GEC type is selected, you can only use the switch for link aggregation.
When adding/deleting a FEC/GEC type member, perform such operation under a linked down state.
ꢀ
Only a link down error between a LAN card (onboard LAN) and the switch it connects with, and the
equivalent errors lead to switching of the route. Therefore, if only the switch or LAN card (onboard
LAN) is partially damaged and the route being used is sound at the link level, the route will not be
switched in the team, but the communication with the Team may become an error.
■ Teaming Configuration Procedure
®
1
Start up Intel PROSet. The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Intel(R) PROSet".
2
3
Select a card to incorporate in a Team and right-click it.
Click [Create New Team] in [Add to Team].
[Teaming Up Wizard] appears.
162
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
Select a Teaming type with which you want to create a Team.
Select the following depending on the Teaming type selected accordingly:
• AFT type: "Adapter fault tolerance"
• ALB type: "Adaptive load balancing"
• SFT type: "Switch fault tolerance"
• FEC type: "FEC/802.3ad Static link aggregation"
• GEC type: "GEC/802.3ad Static link aggregation"
5
6
7
Select a LAN card to incorporate in the Team and click [Next].
Click [Finish].
Click [OK].
When the Teaming setting is completed, the following virtual adapter will be created.
• "Intel(R) Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter"
Upper protocols will be bound with the main virtual adapter.
You cannot bind them with the LAN card consisting of a Team.
The IP address can be set in the main virtual adapter.
5.7.5 VLAN
5
■ Notes
When using a VLAN, note the following points.
•
•
•
•
You can only have "NetBIOS over TCP/IP" enabled for up to four VLANs in the whole system.
On a VLAN, do not use protocols other than TCP/IP.
You can only set ten or less VLANs to a LAN port.
When adding or deleting a VLAN, always use "Intel(R) PROSet". Do not disable or delete a VLAN
from the [Device Manager] or [Network and Dial-up Connections].
■ VLAN Configuration Procedure
®
1
Start up Intel PROSet. The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up “Intel(R) PROSet”.
2
Select a LAN card to setup a VLAN and right-click it.
163
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
3
4
Click [Add VLAN]. The following message may be displayed at the time. In such
a case, click [Yes].
You need to connect with the switch that supports IEEE
VLANs (802.1Q). Do you want to enable QOS Packet Tagging?
Specify [ID] and [Name]. Then click [OK].
The [ID] should be identical with the switch setting.
The [Name] does not need to be identical with the switch setting.
5
6
Repeat Step 3 through 5 to set respective VLANs.
Click [OK].
When setup of the VLAN is completed, the following virtual adapter will be created.
• "Intel(R) Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter"
Upper protocols will be bound with the main virtual adapter. You cannot bind them with the LAN
card consisting a VLAN. The IP address should be specified in the main virtual adapter.
5.7.6 Local Address Setting
Specify a local address according to the following procedures:
®
1
Start up Intel PROSet. The procedure differs depending on the OS being
used.
For Windows Server 2003
1. Click [Start] → [Control Panel] → [Intel(R) PROSet].
For Windows 2000 Server
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Start up "Intel(R) PROSet".
2
3
Select a LAN card to set the local address and click [Advanced] tab.
Specify a local address in [Locally Managed Address].
164
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5.7.7 Jumbo Frame
1000BASE-T/1000BASE-SX supports Jumbo frame. When using Jumbo frame, construct the Jumbo
frame network using only devices that support Jumbo frame and apply the settings that will enable
Jumbo frame.
Configure setting for Jumbo frame according to the following procedures.
1
2
3
Start up "Intel(R) PROSet" from [Control Panel].
Select a LAN card to perform configuration and click [Advanced] tab.
Specify the maximum frame size in [Jumbo Frame] tab.
■ Other Cautions
You cannot connect devices directly with a cross cable without connecting a hub switch or router in
between.
5
165
Chapter 5 Operations after OS Installation
166
Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool
6.1 RAID Management Tool [Global
Array Manager]
RAID Management Tool is software that perform array configuration, disk initialization
and disk array monitoring when using RAID card. For more details, refer to
"PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement" supplied with
options.
Batch installation using ServerStart
ꢀ
If the OS is installed using ServerStart, RAID Management Tool is batch installed with the OS and
other high reliability tools. If manually installing the OS, install RAID Management Tool manually.
6.1.1 Installing RAID Management Tool (Global Array
Manager)
To Install RAID Management Tool individually using the standard installer, follow the procedures
below.
ꢀ
Before performing Global Array Manager, check that TCP/IP is installed and works properly.
1
Log on to the server with administrator privileges.
ꢀ
Exit all programs before starting installation.
Installation will fail if “Event Viewer” or “Computer Management” is run.
2
3
Insert the ServerStart CD-ROM. Click [Start] → [Run...].
Enter a name in the [Open:] field as follows and click [OK].
[CD-ROM drive]: \PROGRAMS\GENERAL\LSI\GAM\install.bat
Installation starts and the wizard window appears.
For subsequent procedures, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and
"Supplement" supplied with options.
168
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ When an error screen appears after installation (Windows Server
2003 only)
If Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 is applied, when restarting after installing/uninstalling RAID
Management Tool (Global Array Manager) the following message may appear.
In order to protect the computer, this program is terminated by
Windows.
Name: SNMP Service
There is no problem with operations. Click [Close Message] to close the message.
6.1.2 Settings when using RAID Management Tool in Linux
When using RAID Management Tool in a Linux environment, after installing Global Array Manager,
use the following procedures to change the GAM Server service activation sequence. When Linux is a
bundle type perform settings changes.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Log in with "root".
This setting is necessary when the GAM version is "6.02-18". If the GAM version is unknown, check as
shown below using the rpm command.
# rpm -q gam-server
gam-server-6.02-18
1
Edit "/etc/init.d/gam" in the text editor.
Using the vi command etc., change the chkconfig setting at located at the start of the file.
# vi /etc/init.d/gam
# chkconfig: 2345 40 60
↓Change
6
# chkconfig: 2345 99 60
2
3
Reflect the changed settings.
Execute the following commands and after temporarily deleting the GAM Server service re-
attach it.
# chkconfig --del gam
# chkconfig --add gam
Check if the changed settings are reflected correctly.
Execute the following commands and check if the service is "on" in run level 2 to 5.
# chkconfig --list gam
gam 0:off 1:off 2:on 3:on 4:on 5:on 6:off
169
Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool
6.2 Server Monitoring Tool
[ServerView]
ServerView constantly monitors the status of the servers' hardware in the network
and provides a console with which the administrator can check the status of all the
servers at a glance. In addition, if an error occurs, the administrator will be notified in
real-time to take immediate action.
■ Installing ServerView
● When Installed Using ServerStart
If the OS is implemented and setup using ServerStart, ServerView will be installed at once with the OS
and other high reliability tools.
● When Installed Manually
Perform installation referring to "Chapter 2 Installing" in "ServerView User’s Guide".
● For Linux
ServerView cannot be installed using ServerStart. To install ServerView into a Linux system, refer to
"ServerView User’s Guide".
ꢀ
Be sure to install SNMP service before installing ServerView.
■ When an error screen appears after ServerView installation
(Windows Server 2003 only)
If Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 is applied, when restarting after installing/uninstalling
ServerView the following message may appear.
In order to protect the computer, this program is terminated by
Windows.
Name: SNMP Service
There is no problem with operations. Click [Close Message] to close the message.
■ Setting Required after Installation
Perform necessary operations after ServerView installation referring to "2.4 Checking after Installation"
in "ServerView User’s Guide".
■ Boot Monitoring Setting
We recommend enabling the "Boot Monitoring" function after ServerView is installed. For setting
procedures and explanation on the function, refer to "[Restart Settings] Tab" of "3.2.4 Serious Error
Handling" in "ServerView User’s Guide".
170
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Notes on Using the Console Redirection Function
When performing console redirection using ServerView RemoteControleService in this server, connect
UPS and external modem devices to serial connector 2 (COM2). For details about
RemoteControleService functions refer to "Chapter 5 Using RemoteControleService" in the
"ServerView User’s Guide".
6
171
Chapter 6 High Reliability Tool
6.3 Solving Problems Early [DSNAP]
DSNAP is a tool for collectively acquiring failure investigation information such as
server environment information.
Batch installation using ServerStart
ꢀ
If the OS is installed using ServerStart, DSNAP are batch installed with the OS and other high reliability
tools. If manually installing the OS, install DSNAP manually.
■ Installing DSNAP
When installing DSNAP separately, copy the "DSNAP.EXE" file stored in the
"\PROGRAMS\Japanese\DSNAP" folder of the ServerStart CD-ROM into the server's hard disk.
■ How to Use
This topic is discussed in the "\PROGRAMS\Japanese\DSNAP\README.TXT" file in the ServerStart
CD-ROM. Use a text editor to open it.
172
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.1 Before Installing Hardware
Options
The following types of hardware options can be installed in this server.
5 inch storage bay
(internal 5 inch SCSI option)
Memory
Expansion card
CPU
3.5 inch storage bay
(internal hard disk unit)
ꢀ
ꢀ
If devices listed below are optionally purchased, refer to the following to check the packaged items
before installing.
• Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kitꢁ"B.4 Internal Hard Disk Unit Bay Conversion Kit" (pg.303)
When installing and removing options, make sure to use the removed screws on the same devices that
were last installed or removed. Failure to do so can damage the device.
This manual explains how to install hardware options in a pedestal-type server as an example.
The type of optional devices listed in this manual are liable to be updated without any notice. Please be
forewarned.
ꢀ
ꢀ
174
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
• When installing/removing hardware options to/from the server, turn off the
server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug
all power cables from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock
• Do not disassemble the PSU. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Do not install unauthorized third party hardware options. Doing so may cause
a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a
device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for approximately
10 minutes after shutdown before installing or removing hardware options.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of hardware options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards and soldered parts. Hold the metallic
areas or the edge of the circuit boards.
• When installing a 5-inch internal device, make sure to avoid pinching cables.
• If devices are installed other than by the methods outlined in this chapter or
disassembled, the warranty will be invalidated.
7
175
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.2 Removing and Attaching Covers
Remove covers to install hardware options. Perform the following procedures to
remove covers.
• When removing or attaching covers, turn off the server, all peripheral devices,
and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from the
outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock ("1.4.4 Turning Off the Server"
(ꢁpg.36)).
7.2.1 Removing Covers
1
2
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Slide the drive cover up.
When the drive cover is locked with the drive cover key, unlock the drive cover before sliding it
up.
3
Remove the hard disk cover.
Tilt the hard disk cover toward you and pull it up to remove.
176
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
Remove the side cover.
1. Release the side cover lock on the rear side (1) and remove the screw (2).
Turn the side cover key counterclockwise to unlock the cover.
Side cover key
2. Slowly slide the side cover to the rear side, and then tilt it toward you to remove it
from the server.
7
177
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
5
Remove the front cover.
1. The front cover is fastened with two stoppers. Pull the stoppers to remove at the
bottom of the server.
Stoppers
2. Lift the front cover upward to remove.
ꢀ
Remove the front cover as necessary, e.g., when you install a 5-inch internal device.
■ Installing Covers
To attach covers, simply reverse the removal procedures.
• Before turning on the server, make sure that all covers are in place.
• Check to make sure no tools or unnecessary components are left inside the
server before attaching the side cover back into place.
178
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
Installing the front cover
ꢀ
When attaching the front cover, insert the intrusion switch on the front side into the hole in the cover.
Before attaching, check that the hook on the top is securely hooked.
Insert the switch
into the hole
7.2.2 Removing the Top Cover of the Rackmount Type
When the Rackmount Conversion kit for TX200S2 (optional) is used, remove the top cover. The top
cover of the rackmount type corresponds to the side cover of the pedestal type.
1
Open the rack door.
2
3
Remove all cables connected to the server.
Remove the retaining screws used to fasten the server to the rack.
7
179
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
4
Slide the server.
Hold the handles from inside and pull the server out toward you until it clicks, so that it locks in
place on the rails on both sides.
Lock
Lock
5
Remove the top cover.
The procedures for removing the top cover is the same as that for removing the side cover.
Remove the screws on the rear side. Slowly slide the top cover to the rear side, and then remove
it from the server.
■ Attaching the Top Cover
To attach the top cover, simply reverse the removal procedures.
• Before turning on the server, make sure that all covers are in place.
• Check to make sure no tools or unnecessary components are left inside the
server before attaching the top cover back into place.
180
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.3 Installing a CPU
The server can have up to two CPUs by adding an optional CPU.
• When installing or removing a CPU, turn off the server, all peripheral devices,
and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from the
outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Do not install unauthorized third party CPUs. This could damage the server.
• Do not use CPUs that differ in frequency/cache size. The system may become
unable to start up.
• The circuit boards and soldered parts of hardware options are exposed. They
can be damaged by static electricity.
Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static
electricity.
• Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas
or the edge of the circuit boards.
7
181
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.3.1 Where to Install CPUs
Install the CPU sockets in order of socket 0 to 1.
An additional CPU is installed in CPU socket 1. CPU socket 0 is installed with a CPU by default. After
installing the CPU, install the CPU fan supplied with the CPU.
↓Baseboard
CPU socket 0
(Standard)
CPU fan 0
(Standard)
CPU socket 1
CPU fan1
Rear
Front
7.3.2 Installable CPUs and Notes
■ Installable CPUs
The following CPUs can be installed in this server.
table: Installable CPUs
Model
Product ID
PG-FG232
PG-FG233
PG-FG234
Processor Xeon 3.0GHz/2MB
Processor Xeon 3.2GHz/2MB
Processor Xeon 3.6GHz/2MB
■ Notes on Installation
The additional CPU must be the same model (with the same frequency/cache size) as the existing CPU.
182
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.3.3 How to Install a CPU
1
2
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Remove the side cover
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the two ventilation system covers.
Latch
Ventilation system covers
5
Remove the CPU cover.
Latch
7
183
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
6
Remove the CPU fan holder.
Latch
Latch
7
Release the lever on the CPU socket.
Pull up to open the socket lever fully. A CPU cannot be installed unless the socket lever is fully
open.
Socket lever
• The socket lever turns approx. 135 degrees.
Be sure to open the socket lever fully to release it. If the socket
lever is not fully open during CPU installation, the CPU may be
damaged.
184
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
Install the CPU.
Align the triangle on the CPU socket (pin 1 marking) with the triangle on the CPU, and insert the
pins into the socket. Return the socket lever to the original position.
Pin 1 marking
Socket lever
CPU
• When installing the CPU in the socket, be careful not to bend CPU
pins.
9
Install the heat sink.
Attach the heat sink to the installed CPU and fasten it with the screws.
Carefully tighten the screws in diagonal order.
Heat sink
7
CPU
185
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
10 Install the CPU fan.
1. Remove the dummy cover from the CPU fan holder.
Dummy cover
2. Pull the CPU fan lever and install the CPU fan in the CPU fan holder.
CPU fan
186
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
3. Return the lever to fasten the CPU fan.
11 Install the CPU fan holder to the server.
To attach it, simply reverse the removal procedure.
• When installing the CPU fan holder, make sure not to damage the
cables.
12 Install the two ventilation system covers.
To attach them, simply reverse the removal procedure.
13 Install the side cover.
14 Turn on the server and start the BIOS Setup Utility. Initialize the Extended
System Configuration Data (ESCD) area.
1. Start the BIOS Setup Utility and set [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced]
menu to [Yes].
2. From the [Exit] menu, select [Save Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key.
7
15 Store the BIOS settings.
187
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.3.4 Defective CPU Disconnection Function
This server is equipped with the defective CPU disconnection function.
This function disconnects the CPU judged to be defective (abnormal) during Power On Self Test
(POST) and start the server. On two-CPU servers, if one CPU is defective, the other CPU starts up the
server.
The failed CPU can be checked with the information displayed during POST or from the [Server] menu
Replace the defective CPU, if discovered, and then restart the server.
■ Replacing the Defective CPU
ꢁ
After replacing the CPU, start the BIOS Setup Utility and select the [Server] menu → the [CPU Status]
submenu to check that [CPU n Status] (n is the number of the replaced CPU) is set to [Enabled]. If the
item is set to [Failed], change the setting to [Enabled]. If it is not set to [Enabled], the server will start
with the CPU recognized as being defective and constantly disconnected. To use the new CPU, set the
item to [Enabled] for releasing the failed CPU status at the next startup.
188
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.4 Installing Memory Modules
Additional memory will help to increase the amount of data to read at a time and
improve the server processing capability.
• When installing or removing a memory module, turn off the server, all
peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power
cables from the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Use our genuine memory modules only.
Failure to do so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• Wait for a sufficient period of time after server shutdown before installing or
removing memory.
Failure to do so can cause burns.
• When installing or removing memory, make sure to remove the screws on the
specified points only. There is a chance of injury if screws other than those on
the specified points are removed. This could also damage the server.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
This could cause injury. This could also damage the server.
• Memory modules are made of delicate components that are extremely
sensitive to static electricity, and they can be destroyed by static electricity
from your clothes or body. Before handling them, first touch some metallic
object to discharge static electricity.
• Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. This could damage the
server.
• As shown in the figure below, hold the edges of the memory module. Do not
touch the gold contacts.
Do not touch this part.
Memory module
7
189
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.4.1 Where to Install the Memory Module
Install memory modules to the memory slots in the server.
One memory bank consists of Slots A and B in this server. To add more memory, install a pair of
memory modules, each having the same capacity, to the corresponding slots in the sequence of Bank 2,
Bank 1, and Bank 0.
↓Baseboard
Memory Slot 2B
Memory Slot 2A
Memory Slot 1B
Memory Slot 1A
Memory Slot 0B
Memory Slot 0A
Memory Bank
Memory Bank
Memory Bank
2
1
0
Rear
Front
•
•
Bank 2: For basic RAM modules or memory modules that can be installed with the basic RAM
module conversion kit.
Banks 0 and 1: For add-on RAM modules.
7.4.2 Installable Memory Modules and Notes
■ Installable Memory Modules
The following memory module types can be used in this server.
table: List of Usable Memory Modules
Model
Remarks
Memory Module-512MB (PG-RM51AE)
Memory Module-1GB (PG-RM1AE)
Memory Module-2GB (PG-RM2AE)
512MB (256MB-DIMM x 2)
1GB (512MB-DIMM x 2)
2GB (1GB-DIMM x 2)
190
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Notes When Installing Memory
The memory used in this server is composed of a pair of DIMM. Make sure to install a pair of DIMMs,
each having the same capacity.
● Identifying Memory Modules
Check that the number beginning with "CA" (e.g., CA05946-E101) printed on the label is same on the
two DIMMs. Be sure to use a pair of modules with the same number. If the DIMMs have identification
labels, be sure to install a pair of DIMMs with the same capacity with the label placed on the same
location.
•
Identification label location
Identification label A
Identification label B
Identification label C
1
•
Identification label patterns
When a memory module is viewed so that the corner circled in the above figure comes to the lower
left, identification labels are applied in any of the following patterns.
table: Identification Label Patterns
Pattern
Label A
Not applied
Applied
Label B
Not applied
Not applied
Applied
Label C
Not applied
Not applied
Not applied
Applied
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Not applied
Applied
Applied
Applied
Applied
7
191
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.4.3 How to Install Memory Module
1
2
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Remove the side cover.
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the ventilation system cover above the memory slots.
Release the latch on the ventilation system cover and lift it up to remove.
Latch
Ventilation
system cover
5
To replace the memory module, open outward the retention clips on both sides
of the slot.
• Make sure not to open the clips outward too quickly because the
memory module may pop up, which could cause damage.
192
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
Open the retention clips on both sides of the slot and insert the memory
module.
Align a notch of the memory module to correspond with the memory slot and insert the module
perpendicularly to the slot.
When the module is correctly inserted, the retention clips on both sides will close. Then, check
that they secure the memory module.
If the retention clips are not securely closed, push them with your fingers to close.
Align notch
• An improperly engaged memory module could cause a fire. Do not
insert the memory module on the wrong side.
7
Attach the ventilation system cover.
To attach it, simply reverse the removal procedures.
8
9
Attach the side cover.
Turn on the server and start the BIOS Setup Utility. Initialize the Extended
System Configuration Data (ESCD) area.
1. Start the BIOS Setup Utility and set [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced]
menu to [Yes].
2. From the [Exit] menu, select [Save Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key.
7
10 Store the BIOS settings.
193
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.4.4 Defective Memory Disconnection Function
This server is equipped with the defective memory disconnection function.
This function disconnects the memory judged to be defective (abnormal) during Power On Self Test
(POST) to start the server. When POST is executed, if the memory capacity is discovered to be smaller
than the capacity of the memory installed, there is a possibility of memory defect.
You can check the slot whose memory is defective from the system event log.
Replace the defective memory, if discovered, and then restart the server.
■ Replacing the Defective Memory
1
2
3
4
Check the slot whose memory is defective from the system event log.
Replace the defective memory with a new one according to "7.4.3 How to
Install Memory Module" (ꢀpg.192).
Turn on the server and start the BIOS Setup Utility.
Select the [Memory Status] submenu from the [Server] menu and check that
[Memory Module nn] (nn is the number of the replaced memory module) is set
to [Enabled].
If the item is set to [Failed], change the setting to [Enabled].
ꢁ
If it is not set to [Enabled], the server will start with the memory module recognized as being
defective and constantly disconnected. To use a new memory module, set the item to
[Enabled] for releasing the failed memory status at the next startup.
194
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.5 Installing an Expansion Card
This section explains the types of expansion card, notes and installation procedures.
• When installing or removing an expansion card, turn off the server, all
peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power
cables from the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Install our genuine expansion cards only.
Failure to do so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• Wait for a sufficient period of time after server shutdown before installing or
removing expansion cards.
Failure to do so can cause burns.
• When installing or removing expansion cards, make sure to remove the screws
on the specified points only.
There is a chance of injury if screws other than those on the specified points
are removed. This could also damage the server.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
Failure to do so could cause injury and also damage the server.
• Do not touch metal fixings of the main board on the rear side of the server. This
could cause injury. This could also damage the server.
• Expansion cards are made of delicate components that are extremely sensitive
to static electricity, and they can be destroyed by static electricity from your
clothes or body. Before handling them, first touch some metallic object to
discharge static electricity.
7
195
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.5.1 Where to Install an Expansion Card
The server has five PCI slots to accommodate up to five expansion cards.
Rear
Front
↓Baseboard
PCI slot 5 (32bit33MHz)
PCI slot 4 (64bit133MHz)
PCI slot 3 (64bit133MHz)
PCI slot 2 (64bit100MHz)
PCI slot 1 (64bit100MHz)
ꢁ
ꢁ
The clock frequency depends on the number and specifications of the expansion cards installed.
Only slot 5 is mounted on the PCI board.
196
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.5.2 Installable Expansion Cards and Notes on
Installation
■ Installable Expansion Cards
Up to five expansion cards listed on the following table can be installed in the server.
table: List of Installable Expansion Cards
Number
of cards
Installable card (Model name)
Remarks
Remote Service Board (PG-RSB103)
1
1
1
RAID Ctrl 0-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
(PG-140D1)
1
2
2
For internal array system
(Ultra 320 0ch SCSI)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3)
4
4
For internal/external array systems
(Ultra 320 2ch SCSI)
SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128)
For internal/external SCSI devices
(Ultra 160 SCSI)
Fibre Channel Controller (PG-FC106)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1892)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-SX Fibre LC (PG-1882)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852)
Eth. Ctrl 2x1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1862)
2
4
2
3
2
1000BASE-T
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-T
1000BASE-T
■ Order of Expansion Card Installation
Install expansion cards into the slots in accordance with the priority indicated in the following table.
ꢁ
Follow the "Installation order" shown in the table when installing the cards and drivers. If you turn on
the power after installing multiple expansion cards simultaneously or in a wrong order, they will not
function properly.
table: Expansion Card Installation Order and Slots
7
PCI slot
Installation
order
Installable expansion card (Model name)
1
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
1
-
Remote service board (PG-RSB103)
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RAID Ctrl 0-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-140D1)
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128)
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
-
-
-
2
2
4
4
4
3
4
3
3
1
1
1
4
1
4
4
2
2
2
5
2
-
-
Fibre Channel Controller (GP-FC106)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1892)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-SX Fibre LC (PG-1882)
Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852)
Eth. Ctrl 2x1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1862)
-
-
-
1
-
197
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
■ Notes on Installing Expansion Cards
•
•
Install installable expansion cards only.
Before installing an expansion card, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server,
and "Supplement" supplied with options. Also, check the following for respective expansion cards.
● Points to Note when Installing RAID Card (PG-140D1/PG-142E3)
•
Connection of a SCSI device
Connect the SCSI device supported by this server. Operations are not guaranteed when an
unsupported SCSI device is connected. For details about connection patterns, refer to "■
Connections" (ꢀpg.209).
•
Precautions before OS installation
In addition to the completion of RAID card configuration, the hard disk under the RAID card must be
initialized or the background initialization process must be started before the OS is installed. When
the OS is installed using ServerStart, ServerStart performs configuration and hard disk initialization
automatically.
•
•
Installation locations
If the hard disk unit where the OS is installed is connected to the RAID card, install the RAID card in
Slot 1.
PCI slot settings
When connecting to an external SCSI device (when not connecting with an internal hard disk unit)
after installing the RAID card (PG-140D1/ PG-142E3), set the following BIOS setting to "Disabled"
(Set to "Disabled" at time of purchase).
However, when a RAID card (PG-140D1/PG-142E3) has been installed to PCI slot 1 and connecting
to the internal hard disk units, select BIOS setup utility "Advanced" menu → "PCI Configuration"
sub menu → "PCI slot 1 Configuration Option ROM SCAN" to change the setting to "Enabled". For
When the configuration for connecting to the internal hard disk has been selected after the RAID card
was installed on an array type or customized type, the BIOS settings of PCI Slot 1 are set to
"Enabled" at the time of purchase.
198
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● When a RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3) is Installed and an
Internal Hard Disk Unit is Connected
When connecting to the internal hard disk after installing the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3), it is necessary to reconnect the SCSI cable of the internal hard disk from the onboard
connector to the RAID card. Refer to the following connection diagram and reconnect the SCSI cable
after installing the expansion card.
Terminal resistor
Secondary IDE
connector
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU(PG-142E3)
SCSI connector A
: Connection before
PG-142E3 installation
: Connection after
PG-142E3 installation
ch0
SCSI connector B
Terminal resistor
Secondary IDE
connector
SCSI Ctrl U160
(PG-128, etc.)
SCSI connector A
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU(PG-142E3)
ch0
7
SCSI connector B
ch1
199
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
● When the Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852) is Installed in Slot 5
Before installing the Eth. Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852) in Slot 5, remove the cover from the Eth.
Ctrl 1000-BASE-T Cu (PG-1852).
Cover
Screws
When installing the card to the PCI board, use the four stoppers to fasten the card.
ꢁ
For the driver installation procedure, refer to README.txt supplied with the driver.
■ Installing the Remote Service Board
● Notes Before Installing
When installing the remote service board, note the following points:
• Do not connect the remote service board AC adapter until you finish installing
the remote service board and attaching all the server covers. Failure to do so
may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• When replacing remote service boards or adding other optional devices,
unplug the power cable of the remote service board AC adapter from the outlet
before operation. Failure to do so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric
shock.
200
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Connecting the Server Control Cable and Internal Power Cable
When installing the remote service board, the server control cable and internal power cable need to be
connected.
Connect the cables that came with the remote service board as shown in the figure below: the server
control cable and internal power cable connected to the ports on the remote service board and the ports
on the baseboard respectively. Then install the remote service board in PCI Slot 5.
[Remote service board]
Internal power connector
(5 pins)
Internal power cable
Server control
cable
Server control connector
(4 pins)
[Baseboard]
Internal power
connector
(5 pins)
Server control
connector
(4 pins)
7
After attaching the side cover of the server, connect the following cables. For how to connect cables,
refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement" supplied with options.
•
•
•
•
USB cable
VGA branch cable
LAN cable
AC adapter
201
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
ꢁ
ꢁ
To make it easier to connect the server control cable into the server control port, apply pressure from
the cable side to the port side.
To use the remote service board, ServerView is required. Be sure to install it. For how to install
board functions, refer to "ServerView User’s Guide."
ꢁ
ꢁ
When the remote service board is connected, the monitor brightness may become lower. In this case,
adjust the monitor for higher brightness.
The recommended screen refresh rate for the monitor is 70Hz. In case of poor resolution of the
monitor display, set the screen refresh rate to 70Hz.
7.5.3 How to Install an Expansion Card
1
2
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Remove the side cover.
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Push the slide lock to the left and remove the slot cover.
When installing a card in Slot 5, remove the PCI board.
Slide lock
PCI board
ꢁ
Be sure to keep the removed slot cover or dummy cards for later use.
If operating the server with no expansion card, attach the slot cover to keep dust away.
202
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
When installing a card in Slot 5, remove the dummy card from the PCI board
and install the expansion card to the PCI board.
1. Lift the stopper latches or slightly bend the PCI board outward to remove the PCI
dummy card.
Lift stopper latches
PCI dummy
PCI board
2. Slide to remove the stoppers.
Note:
Stoppers do not slide upward.
Stoppers
3. Install the expansion card to the PCI board and fasten it with stoppers.
7
ꢁ
Use stoppers in four of six locations depending on the card.
203
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
6
Firmly press the expansion card into the connector of the PCI slot and put the
slide lock back in place to lock.
Slide lock
7
Attach the side cover.
■ Removing the Expansion Card
To remove the expansion card, simply reverse the installation procedures.
204
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.6 Installing Internal Hard Disk
Units
This section explains how to install internal hard disk units.
• When installing or removing internal hard disk units, turn off the server, all
peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power
cables from the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Install our genuine internal hard disk units only. Failure to do so may cause a
device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• When installing or removing hardware options, make sure to remove the
screws on the specified points only.
There is a chance of injury if screws other than those on the specified points
are removed. This could also damage the server.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
Failure to do so could cause injury and also damage the server.
ꢁ
Before adding an internal hard disk unit, install the OS and turn off the server.
7
205
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.6.1 Where to Install Internal Hard Disk Units
Install internal hard disk units in 3.5-inch storage bay.
By, installing the optional internal hard disk unit conversion kit, it becomes possible to convert a 5 inch
storage bay to a 3.5 inch storage bay.
ꢁ
When the Upgrade kit 6 hard disks 2 channel (2x3) is used, the internal hard disk unit bay conversion
kit cannot be installed.
[Inside]
5 inch
storage bay
3.5 inch
storage bay
206
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.6.2 Installable Internal Hard Disk Units and Notes
Before installing an internal hard disk unit, check the following points.
■ Installable Internal Hard Disk Units
The following types of SCSI hard disks can be installed in this server.
table: Installable Internal Hard Disk Units
Disk capacity
73.4GB
Model number
PG-HDH71K
Overview
Ultra320 SCSI, 10,000rpm
Ultra320 SCSI, 15,000rpm
Ultra320 SCSI, 10,000rpm
Ultra320 SCSI, 10,000rpm
73.4GB
146.8GB
300GB
PG-HDH75K
PG-HDH41K
PG-HDH31K
■ Notes
Note the following points to avoid failures:
•
Inside the hard disk unit, the disk for storing data is rotating at high speed to read and write data.
Because this server is very delicate, do not move, strike, or shake it when it is turned on.
Do not use or store the device in a location affected by extreme temperature changes.
Keep the device away from direct sunlight and from radiators or other heat source.
Use or store the device on a shock-and-vibration free surface.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use or store the device in a humid or dusty place.
Do not use or store the device near magnets or devices that generate magnetic fields.
Do not disassemble or take the device apart.
Keep the disk away from condensation or water droplets.
ꢁ
Mishandling could result in destruction of the data stored in the disk. Make sure to keep a backup of
important data. Even if the hard disk is of the same type, there could be a slight difference in storage
capacity. We recommend backing up data on the basis of files or sectors rather than hard disks.
7
207
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
■ SCSI ID and Order of Installation
The numbers and SCSI IDs of the 3.5-inch storage bays are as follows.
The SCSI IDs for internal hard disk units are set automatically.
[Standard drive cage (1ch)]
[With Upgrade kit 6 hard disks
2 channel (2x3)]
[With internal hard disk
unit bay conversion kit]
Bay9 : ID=2
Bay8 : ID=1
Bay7 : ID=0
ch1
CD-ROM/FDD
CD-ROM/FDD
Bay6 : ID=2
CD-ROM/FDD
Bay6 : ID=5
Bay5 : ID=4
Bay4 : ID=3
Bay3 : ID=2
Bay2 : ID=1
Bay1 : ID=0
Bay6 : ID=5
Bay5 : ID=4
Bay4 : ID=3
Bay3 : ID=2
Bay2 : ID=1
Bay1 : ID=0
ch1
Bay5 : ID=1
Bay4 : ID=0
Bay3 : ID=2
Bay2 : ID=1
Bay1 : ID=0
ch0
ch0
[Rack mount type (1ch)]
CD-ROM/FDD
Install internal hard disk units in the following order.
table: Order of Internal Hard Disk Unit Installation
Number of channels
Order of installation
Standard drive cage (1ch)
Bay 1 → Bay 2 → Bay 3 → Bay 4 → Bay 5 → Bay 6
Bay 1 → Bay 4 → Bay 2 → Bay 5 → Bay 3 → Bay 6
Upgrade kit 6 hard disks 2 channel
(2x3)
Internal hard disk unit bay conversion
kit (2ch)
Bay 1 → Bay 2 → Bay 3 → Bay 4 → Bay 5 → Bay 6 →
Bay 7 → Bay 8 → Bay 9
208
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Connections
Internal hard disk units are connected as described below.
For an array type (array system configuration) install the RAID Ctrl 0-Channel 128MB w/ BBU in PCI
slot 1.
For a basic RAID card conversion kit, install the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PGB1U42E3)
in PCI slot 1.
Terminal resistor
Secondary
IDE connector
SCSI connectorA
SCSI connectorB
Terminal resistor
7
Secondary
IDE connector
SCSI Ctrl U160(PG-128)
SCSI connectorA
SCSI connectorB
209
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
[RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)]
Terminal resistor
Secondary
IDE connector
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
SCSI connectorB
ch0
Terminal resistor
Secondary
IDE connector
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
ch1
SCSI connectorB
ch0
210
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.6.3 How to Install the Internal Hard Disk Unit
1
2
3
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Slide the drive cover up.
When the drive cover is locked, unlock the drive cover before sliding it up.
Remove the hard disk cover.
Tilt the hard disk cover toward you and pull it to remove.
4
5
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the dummy unit from the bay to accommodate an internal hard disk
unit.
Pull the dummy unit out towards you with its tabs being pressed inward.
Be sure to keep the removed dummy units for later use.
7
Tabs
211
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
6
Install the internal hard disk unit into the server unit.
Push the unit into the bay with the handle up and pull down the handle to secure.
Handle
7
Attach the hard disk cover.
7.6.4 How to Remove the Internal Hard Disk Unit
1
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
2
3
4
Remove the hard disk cover.
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the internal hard disk unit.
With pressing the front tab of the internal hard disk unit to remove, turn the handle upward and
pull the hard disk unit towards you. To remove the internal hard disk unit, use both hands to pull
it out.
Handle
212
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
5
6
Install a dummy unit or a new hard disk unit.
Attach the hard disk cover.
7.6.5 Replacing the Failed Internal Hard Disk Unit
When an array system is configured with this server, a failed hard disk unit can be replaced and the
restoration can be performed without turning off the server and peripheral devices (hot swappable/hot
pluggable). For array systems, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and
"Supplement" supplied with options.
Perform the replacement as follows:
1
2
Open the hard disk cover.
Locate the failed hard disk unit by checking the hard disk failure LED of each
bay.
3
4
Pull out the failed hard disk unit a little towards you.
Wait for approximately 60 seconds (until the hard disk stops rotating) and pull
out the failed hard disk unit.
5
6
Insert a new hard disk unit.
Execute "Rebuild" or "Make Standby".
"Rebuild" or "Make Standby" may be executed automatically after hard disk unit replacement.
This can be checked from the status of the hard disk failure LED.
7
213
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7.7 Installing 5-inch Internal Options
This section explains how to install a 5-inch internal device like DAT(72) unit. Unlike
external devices, internal device does not need to be connected to the outlet
because its power is supplied from the server. In addition, it offers the advantage of
space saving.
• When installing or removing internal devices, turn off the server, all peripheral
devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Install our genuine internal devices only.
Failure to do so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.
• When installing or removing hardware options, make sure to remove the
screws on the specified points only.
There is a chance of injury if screws other than those on the specified points
are removed. This could also damage the server.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
Failure to do so could cause injury and also damage the server.
ꢀ
Before adding a 5-inch internal device, install the OS and turn off the server.
7.7.1 Where to Install 5-inch Internal Devices
Install 5-inch internal devices in 5-inch storage bays.
[Inside]
5 inch
storage
bay
214
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.7.2 Installable 5-inch Internal Devices and Notes
This section explains installable 5-inch internal devices, SCSI IDs, and connections. Check this section
before installing.
■ Installable 5-inch Internal Devices
The following types of 5-inch internal devices can be installed in this server.
table: Installable 5-inch Internal Devices
Product name
Tape Drv DAT72 36GB internal
Tape Drv VXA-2 80GB
Model
PG-DT501
Available bay
Bays 2 and 3
Bays 2 and 3
Bays 2 and 3
Bays 2 and 3
PG-VX201
PG-LT101
PG-BC102
Tape Drv LTO Ultrim 100GB
Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit
ꢀ
When the Upgrade kit 6 hard disks 2 channel (2x3) is used, the internal hard disk unit bay conversion
kit cannot be installed.
ꢀ
The internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit require two bays to install.
■ Bay Locations and SCSI IDs
The bay locations and SCSI IDs of the 5-inch storage bays are as follows:
Bay3 : ID=6
Bay2 : ID=5
Bay1
CD-ROM/FDD
* When using 2 bays SCSI-ID=5
7
Bay3 : ID=6
Bay2 : ID=5
Bay1
CD-ROM/FDD
[Rack mount type]
■ Connections
Connect 5-inch internal devices as described below.
When the Upgrade kit 6 hard disks 2 channel (2x3) is used and a RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
(PG-142E3) for internal connection is not installed, the onboard SCSI connector cannot be used. Install
a SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128) to connect a 5-inch internal device.
215
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
[Onboard SCSI connector]
Terminal resistor
Secondary
IDE connector
SCSI connectorB
[Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit]
Secondary
IDE connector
SCSI connectorA
SCSI connectorB
216
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
[SCSI Ctrl U160(PG-128)]
Terminal resistor
Secondary
IDE connector
SCSI Ctrl U160(PG-128)
SCSI connectorA
SCSI connectorB
7.7.3 How to Install the 5-inch Internal Device
Perform the following procedures to install a 5-inch internal device. When installing the internal hard
disk unit conversion kit the procedures vary. Refer to"7.7.4 How to Install the Internal Hard Disk Unit
Bay Conversion Kit" (ꢁpg.220).
1
2
3
4
Set SCSI IDs of the 5-inch internal devices.
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
7
Remove the side and front covers.
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
217
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
5
Remove the dummy unit.
Pull the dummy unit out slowly towards you, keeping the tabs on the 5-inch storage bay rails (on
both sides) pressed inward.
Tabs
ꢀ
Be sure to keep the removed dummy units for later use.
6
Detach the 5-inch storage bay rails from the removed dummy unit.
Remove eight screws that fix the 5-inch storage bay rails to detach.
Inch thread
Metric thread
Metric thread
Inch thread
7
Attach the removed 5-inch storage bay rails to the internal device to be added.
Of the eight screws removed from the dummy unit when the 5-inch storage bay rails were
detached, use four metric threads to install the internal device.
218
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8
Install the internal device to the 5-inch storage bay.
Push it into the bay to install the internal device until it clicks.
9
Remove the ventilation system cover on the system fan.
Ventilation system cover
7
10 Connect a SCSI cable to the 5-inch internal devices.
When adding one 5-inch internal device
Use the port A shown in the following cable illustration for SCSI cable connection.
When adding two 5-inch internal devices
When connecting a SCSI cable to the internal devices, use port A shown in the following cable
illustration for the internal device installed in Bay 3 and use port B for the internal device
installed in Bay 2.
Port B
Port A
Terminal resistor
To onboard SCSI
or SCSI Ctrl U160
219
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
11 Connect the SCSI cable to the onboard SCSI port or the SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-
128).
When connecting to the onboard SCSI port
Onboard SCSI connector B
When connecting to the SCSI Ctrl U160
For how to install a SCSI Ctrl U160, refer to "7.5.3 How to Install an Expansion Card"
(ꢁpg.202).
12 Connect the power cable to the 5-inch internal devices.
Connect the power cable to the internal devices to which the SCSI cable is connected.
13 Attach the ventilation system cover.
Make sure to avoid pinching cables when attaching.
14 Attach the front and side covers.
7.7.4 How to Install the Internal Hard Disk Unit Bay
Conversion Kit
ꢀ
When the Upgrade kit 6 hard disks 2 channel (2x3) is used, the internal hard disk unit bay conversion
kit cannot be installed.
1
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
2
3
Remove the side and front covers.
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
220
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
Remove the two dummy units.
Pull the dummy unit out slowly towards you, keeping the latches on the 5-inch storage bay rails
(on both sides) pressed inward.
Latches
ꢀ
Be sure to keep the removed dummy units for later use.
5
Detach the 5-inch storage bay rails from the removed dummy unit.
Remove eight screws that fix the 5-inch storage bay rails to detach.
Inch thread
Metric thread
Metric thread
Inch thread
6
Attach the removed 5-inch storage bay rails to the internal hard disk unit bay
7
conversion kit to be added.
Of the eight screws removed from the dummy unit when the 5-inch storage bay rails were
detached, use four metric threads to install the internal device.
* Also secure the opposite side in the same way.
221
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
7
Install the internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit.
Push it into the 5-inch bay until it clicks.
8
Remove the ventilation system cover on the system fan.
Ventilation system cover
222
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9
Connect the SCSI cable, power cable, and SMB cable to the internal hard disk
unit bay conversion kit.
Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit
SCSI cable
SMB cable
Power cable
10 Install the cable clamp to the SMB cable connector to fasten the SMB cable.
[Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit - Rear]
Cable clamp
SMB cable
7
223
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
11 Connect the SCSI cable to the onboard SCSI or RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB
w/ BBU (PG-142E3).
When connecting to the onboard SCSI port
Onboard SCSI connector B
When connecting to the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU
For how to install the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU, refer to "7.5.3 How to Install an
Expansion Card" (ꢁpg.202).
ꢀ
disk unit bay conversion kit is connected in a 2ch configuration.
12 Attach the ventilation system cover.
Make sure to avoid pinching cables when attaching.
13 Attach the front and side covers.
224
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.8 Installing a Parallel Port
When a parallel port is necessary, install an optional parallel port.
ꢀ
• When installing or removing a parallel port, turn off the server, all peripheral
devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock.
• Touch only the specified part of the printed circuit board.
Failure to do so could cause injury and also damage the server.
• Be careful to avoid injury when handling the parallel port connector panel
removed from the rear of the server.
7.8.1 How to Install a Parallel Port
1
2
Turn off the server and connected devices, and unplug all power cables from
the outlet.
Remove the side cover.
3
4
Touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity.
Remove the ventilation system cover.
7
Release the latch on the ventilation system cover and lift it up to remove.
Latch
Ventilation
system cover
225
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
5
Remove the parallel port connector panel from the rear side.
Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the hole at the center of the panel. Move the screwdriver to the
right and left and pull the panel off.
[Rear]
6
Connect a parallel cable to the onboard parallel connector and attach the
connector of the cable to the rear panel.
Connector
7
Secure the connector using screws from the rear side.
[Rear]
8
9
Attach the ventilation system cover.
Attach the side cover.
226
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
7.9 Connecting External SCSI
Devices
This section explains connection of external SCSI devices.
7.9.1 Connecting a Hard Disk Cabinet
When a RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3) is used, a hard disk cabinet (PRIMERGY
SX30) can be connected to configure a large-capacity array system.
The following shows an example of system configuration and connection.
• Example of system configuration connected to hard disk cabinet(PRIMERGY SX30)
Server
SCSI cable
(PG-CBLS004 / PG-CBLS005: Option)
SCSI cable
(PG-CBLS023: Option)
ch0
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB
Hard disk cabinet
(PRIMERGY SX30)
SCSI cable
(Standard)
w/ BBU (PG-142E3)
ch1
ch1
ch0
chB chA
7.9.2 Connecting External SCSI Devices
External SCSI devices with different SCSI IDs are connected in a daisy chain as shown in the following
figure.
Up to two external SCSI devices can be connected.
7
<Server>
SCSI Ctrl U160 (PG-128)
< External SCSI option>
SCSI cable
SCSI cable
Terminal resistor
227
Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options
■ Notes on Connecting External SCSI Devices
● Terminal Resistor
Install a terminal resistor to the external SCSI device at the end of the daisy chain. Alternatively, use the
auto termination function of the external SCSI device.
Be sure to use the terminal resistor supplied with a SCSI device only on that device.
table: Types of Terminal Resistor
Connector on optional SCSI
Terminal resistor
devices
Half-pitched 68-pin connector
Supplied with optional SCSI devices
● Daisy Chain Connection
Daisy chain connection is impossible between devices with different SCSI interfaces. Use a SCSI Ctrl
U160 separately for connection.
DLT and LTO library devices cannot be connected in a daisy chain.
228
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.1 Switch Settings
The BIOS password setting can be deleted through the switch block settings.
ꢀ
Do not change the switch settings except when deleting the BIOS password.
8.1.1 Switch Location and Settings
■ Switch Location
The switch block of the server is located on the baseboard as shown below.
Switch block
■ Switch Settings
The switch settings are as follows:
table: Switch Settings
Switch number
Switch 1
Description
Always keep in OFF position.
Switch 2
When deleting the password turn to "ON". After the operation always
return the switch to its original "OFF" position.
Switch 3
Switch 4
Always keep in OFF position.
Always keep in OFF position.
230
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2 BIOS Setup Utility
This section explains settings for the BIOS Setup Utility and items regarding each
setting.
8.2.1 Starting and Exiting the BIOS Setup Utility
The following explains how to start and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
■ How to Start the BIOS Setup Utility
1
2
Turn the server on.
During POST, press the [F2] key while the message "<F2>BIOS Setup / <F12>
BOOT Menu" is displayed on the screen.
The [Main menu] window appears when the POST completes.
8
When the [Main menu] window does not appear
ꢀ
When the [Main menu] window does not appear because the [F2] is pressed at wrong timing,
press the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] keys at the same time to restart the system, then start the
BIOS Setup Utility.
231
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
ꢀ
While the message "<F2> BIOS Setup / <F12> BOOT Menu" is displayed, pressing the [F12] key
causes the Boot Menu screen to appear when POST completes.
Boot Menu
1. CD-ROM Drive
2. +Diskette
3. +Hard Drive
4. Legacy LAN Card
<
> Select <Enter> Confirm
● Key Operations in the BIOS Setup Utility
The roles of the keys used for setting the BIOS Setup Utility are as follows:
table: List of Key Operations on the BIOS Setup Utility Window
Key
Description
[F1]
Displays Help.
[Esc]
Ends this utility. In the case of a submenu it returns to the previous menu.
Scrolls through the menu option list.
[↑][↓]
[←][→]
[-][+]
Switches between menus.
Changes the value of an item.
[Enter]
Activates the selected item or displays the sub menu of items with the mark. In
items in which
is displayed the sub menu appears.
[F9]
Sets each item to its initial (default) value.
[F10]
Saves the setting values and ends the operation. In the case of a submenu it returns
to the previous menu.
■ How to Exit the BIOS Setup Utility
1
Use the [←] [→] keys to display the [Exit] menu.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security Server Exit
Main
Advanced
Item Specific Help
Save Changes & Exit
Discard Changes & Exit
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Execute Command
232
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Use the [↑] [↓] keys to select the exit mode.
To save configuration changes before exiting:
Move the cursor to [Save Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key.
The message "Save configuration changes and exit now?" is displayed.
To exit without saving configuration changes:
Move the cursor to [Discard Changes & Exit] and press the [Enter] key.
When the setting are changed, the "Configuration has not been saved Save before exiting?"
message is displayed.
3
Use the [←] [→] keys to move the cursor to [Yes] or [No], and press the [Enter]
key.
If you selected [Save Changes & Exit] from the [Exit] menu:
• Select [Yes] to exit.
After saving changes to settings, the BIOS Setup Utility closes and the server restarts.
• Select [No] not to exit.
The display returns to the BIOS Setup Utility window.
If you selected [Discard Changes & Exit] from the [Exit] menu:
• Select [Yes] to save changes before exit.
The BIOS Setup Utility closes and the server restarts.
• Select [No] when not saving the settings.
The BIOS Setup Utility closes and the OS starts.
8
233
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.2.2 Main Menu
The [Main] menu is initially displayed when you start the BIOS Setup Utility.
Settings for time and date and for the drives are configured on the [Main] menu.
table: Items on the Main Menu
Item
System Time
Setting
Present time
Description
The system time is set in "hours:minutes:seconds"
format. The hours should be based on a 24-hour clock.
For example, 6:30:00 P.M. is set as "18", "30", "00".
If a highly precise system time is necessary, install a
network synchronized time system (NTP, etc.).
System Date
Diskette A
Present date
The system date is set in "month:day:year" format.
For example, August 20, 2005 is set as "08", "20",
"2005".
1.4M (Fixed parameter)
Sets the type of Floppy Disk Drive A (recording
density and drive size).
IDE Drive1
IDE Drive2
IDE Drive3
IDE Drive4
Boot Options
Sets the type and operating mode for connected IDE devices.
After selecting the IDE device to be set, press the [Enter] key to display the "8.2.3
IDE Drive Submenu" (ꢀpg.235) window.
Sets system startup options. Press the [Enter] key to display the "8.2.4 Boot
Options Submenu" (ꢀpg.236) window.
Base Memory
A usable base memory size of less than 1MB appears.
A memory size of more than 1MB appears.
Extended Memory
234
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.3 IDE Drive Submenu
Sets the type and operating mode for connected IDE devices.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Secondary Master [CD-ROM]
[Auto]
Item Specific Help
Type:
Transfer Mode:
LBA Translation:
32 Bit I/O:
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Enabled]
[Standard]
[Disabled]
PIO Mode:
Ultra DMA Mode:
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the IDE Drive1 / IDE Drive2 / IDE Drive3 / IDE Drive4 Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Type
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Sets the type of the IDE device.
Transfer Mode
LBA Translation
32 Bit I/O
Disabled (Fixed parameter) The server does not support this yet.
Disabled (Fixed parameter) The server does not support this yet.
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the bus width for data transfer between
the processor and the IDE controller.
PIO Mode
• IDE Drive1, IDE Drive2, Displays the data transfer mode.
IDE Drive4
Standard
Cannot be changed.
• IDE Drive3
PIO4/DMA2
Ultra DMA Mode
• IDE Drive1, IDE Drive2, Cannot be changed.
IDE Drive4
Disabled
• IDE Drive3
Mode2
8
235
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.2.4 Boot Options Submenu
Sets system startup options.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Boot Options
Item Specific Help
POST Errors:
Keyboard Check:
SM Error Halt:
Fast Boot:
[Halt On All Errors]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Auto]
Quiet Boot:
NumLock
Boot Menu:
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
MultiBoot for HDs:
Boot sequence:
>
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Boot Options Submenu
Setting Description
Halt On All Errors (Fixed Sets whether or not to stop the boot process and shut down
Item
POST Errors
parameter)
the system, in case a POST (Power On Self Test) error is
detected.
Keyboard Check
• Disabled
Sets whether or not to check keyboard connection during
• Enabled (at the time of POST.
purchase)
SM Error Halt
Fast Boot
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the procedure in case an error occurs regarding the fan
or temperature sensor.
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether or not to reduce the scope of POST and thereby
speed up system startup.
Quiet Boot
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether or not to display the logo screen instead of
POST information.
NumLock
Auto (Fixed parameter)
The state of the NumLock during activation.
Boot Menu
Enabled (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether or not to display the boot drive selection
window after POST.
By selecting the boot drive from the [Boot Menu] window,
startup can be done from the selected boot drive regardless of
the [Boot Sequence] setting.
MultiBoot for HDs
• Disabled (at the time
of purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether or not it is possible to specify the order of hard
disks to boot the operating system (OS) when multiple hard
disk units are installed.
To perform a PXE boot, set to [Enabled].
236
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Boot Options Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
Boot Sequence
• CD-ROM Drive
• Diskette
• Hard Drive
The order of reading the OS is set by pressing [Enter].
Use the [+] [-] keys to change the order of priority for the
selected device. Booting from a selected device can be
disabled with the [Space] key. (The mark "!" is displayed by
the name of the disabled device.) If a non-existing device is
displayed, delete it from the list with the [*] key.
• Legacy LAN Card
8.2.5 Advanced Menu
The [Advanced] menu sets the peripheral device and PCI device options.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Item Specific Help
Setup Warning
Setting items on this menu to incorrect values
may cause your system to malfunction.
Peripheral Configuration
PCI Configuration
>
>
> Advanced System Configuration
> Power On/Off
> IPMI
Reset Configuration Data:
[No]
[1.4]
Multiprocessor Specification:
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Advanced Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Peripheral Configuration
Configures the serial port, parallel port, etc. Press the [Enter] key to display the
PCI Configuration
Configures the PCI device. Press the [Enter] key to display the "8.2.7 PCI
Configuration Submenu" (ꢀpg.240) window.
Advanced System
Configuration
Configures additional settings. Press the [Enter] key to display the "8.2.8
Advanced System Configuration Submenu" (ꢀpg.241) window.
Power On/Off
Configures power On/Off settings. Press the [Enter] key to display the "8.2.9
Power On/Off Submenu" (ꢀpg.243) window.
8
IPMI
Configures server management settings. Press the [Enter] key to display the
Reset configuration Data
• Yes
• No (at the time of Configuration Data (ESCD) where the system resources
purchase) are recorded.
Sets whether or not to initialize the Extended System
237
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
table: Items on the Advanced Menu
Setting
Item
Multiprocessor Specification
Description
1.4 (Fixed
parameter)
Indicates the multiprocessor table version in use.
The multiprocessor table is necessary for the operating
system for multiprocessors to recognize the system's
multiprocessor specifications.
8.2.6 Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Configures the serial port, parallel port, etc.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Peripheral Configuration
Item Specific Help
Serial 1:
[Auto]
Serial Multiplexer:
Serial 2:
[System]
[Auto]
Parallel:
[Auto]
Parallel Mode:
[Bidirection]
Diskette Controller:
Floppy Type:
[Enabled]
[Local]
Local Bus IDE adapter:
[Both]
Mouse Controller:
[Auto Detect]
SCSI Controller:
[Channel A&B]
[Enabled]
SCSI Option ROM Scan:
LAN Controller:
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
LAN Remote Boot:
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Setting Description
• Disabled
Item
Serial 1
Configures Serial Port 1.
• Enabled
• Auto (at the time of
purchase)
• OS Controlled
Serial Multiplexer
• System (at the time of
purchase)
• BMC
Changes the function of Serial Port 1.
• System
Used as a serial port.
• BMC
• Shared
Used as a server management port.
• Shared
The server does not support this yet.
Note:
ꢁ Do not set to [Shared].
Serial 2
Parallel
• Disabled
• Enabled
Configures Serial Port 2.
• Auto (at the time of
purchase)
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Configures the parallel port.
238
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the Peripheral Configuration Submenu
Item
Parallel Mode
Setting
Description
• Printer
• Bidirection (at the time of
Sets the data transfer mode of the parallel port.
purchase)
• EPP
• ECP
Diskette Controller
Floppy Type
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Configures the floppy disk controller.
Local (Fixed parameter)
Sets the type of floppy disk to be used.
When using the server's floppy disk unit, set to
[Local].
When using a remote floppy disk drive or floppy
disk image, set to [Remote] or [Remote Once].
Local Bus IDE adapter
Mouse Controller
Both (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to use the IDE adapter.
• Disabled
• Enabled
Sets whether or not to use the mouse connected to
the mouse port.
• Auto Detect (at the time
of purchase)
SCSI Controller
Channel A & B (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the onboard SCSI
controller.
SCSI Option ROM Scan
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to initialize the extended ROM.
LAN Controller
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the onboard LAN
controller.
LAN Remote Boot
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• PXE
Sets whether or not to perform a network boot.
This function allows booting the server via the
network. It is used for remote installation of the OS,
etc.
8
239
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.2.7 PCI Configuration Submenu
Configures the PCI device.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
PCI Configuration
Item Specific Help
>
>
PCI SLOTS Configuration:
PCI IRQ Configuration:
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the PCI Configuration Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
PCI SLOTS Configuration
Configures the PCI slots. Press the [Enter] key to display the [PCI SLOTS
Configuration] submenu window.
After purchasing a diskless type, when installing a RAID card such as PG-142E3 in
PCI Slot 1 to connect an internal hard disk unit, change the setting for [PCI slot1
Configuration Option ROM SCAN] to [Enabled].
PCI Slot 1 Configuration
Option ROM SCAN
• Enabled
Sets whether or not to initialize the extended ROM in
• Disabled (at the time of each PCI slot.
purchase)
This server has five slots.
PCI Slot 2 Configuration
Option ROM SCAN
PCI Slot 3 Configuration
Option ROM SCAN
PCI Slot 4 Configuration
Option ROM SCAN
PCI Slot 5 Configuration
Option ROM SCAN
PCI IRQ Configuration
Sets PCI IRQs for the PCI slots. Press the [Enter] key to display the [PCI IRQ
Configuration] submenu window.
PCI IRQ Line 1–8
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Sets the PCI IRQ.
240
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.8 Advanced System Configuration Submenu
This menu performs CPU, memory and USB related settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Advanced System Configuration
Item Specific Help
PCI Bus Parity Checking:
[Enabled]
Memory Redundancy:
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
Remap PCI Memory Gap:
CPU Mismatch Detection:
CPU Timeout Counter:
CPU Frequency(GHz):
Hyper-Threading:
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[Automatic]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[Enabled]
[Standard]
[Disabled]
[Next Boot]
[Disabled]
[No Delay]
Limit CPUID functions:
CPU Thermal Management:
CPU Half Mode(C1E):
NX Memory Protection:
CPU MC Status Clear:
Enhanced SpeedStep:
CPU Clock Throttling Delay:
USB Host Controller:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
USB2.0 Host Controller:
USB BIOS Legacy Support:
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Advanced System Configuration Submenu
Setting Description
Item
PCI Bus Parity Checking
Enabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether to enable or disable the PCI bus parity
checking.
Memory Redundancy
• Disabled (at the time of Sets whether or not to use spare memory.
purchase)
• Sparing
Remap PCI Memory Gap
• Disabled (at the time of Sets whether to enable or disable the PCI Memory
purchase)
• Enabled
Gap. When installing 4GB or more memory, set to
[Enabled].
CPU Mismatch Detection
CPU Timeout Counter
CPU Frequency (GHz)
Hyper-Threading
Enabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether to enable or disable checking the CPU
type and frequency.
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
The server does not support this yet.
Automatic (Fixed
parameter)
Displays the options [Installed CPU frequency or
less] and [Automatic].
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to run one CPU as a dual-
processing CPU. The setting [Enabled] may
enhance processing performance by allowing
maximum use of the processor resources.
8
Limit CPUID functions
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
CPU Thermal Management
Enhanced (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting. This item is
displayed only when using the optional 3.6GHz
CPU.
CPU Halt Mode (C1E)
Standard (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
241
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
table: Items on the Advanced System Configuration Submenu
Item
Setting
Description
NX Memory Protection
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
CPU MC Status Clear
Enhanced SpeedStep
Next Boot (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting.
Disabled (Fixed
parameter)
Configures the CPU internal setting. This item is
displayed only when using the optional 3.6GHz
CPU.
CPU Clock Throttling Delay No Delay (Fixed
parameter)
Sets the time delay after which the CPU moves to
throttling when it overheats.
USB Host Controller
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to use the USB host controller.
USB 2.0 Host Controller
USB BIOS Legacy Support
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether to enable or disable the USB 2.0 host
controller.
• Disabled (at the time of Sets whether to enable or disable the USB connected
purchase)
• Enabled
devices also in a DOS environment.
This item cannot be selected when [USB Host
Controller] is set to [Disabled].
242
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.9 Power On/Off Submenu
Configures power On/Off settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
Advanced System Configuration
Item Specific Help
Power Off Source
Software:
Power Button:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
Power On Source
Remote:
[Bios Controlled]
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
[00:00:00]
[Dally]
LAN:
Wake up Timer:
Wake up Time:
Wake up Mode:
Power Failure Recovery:
[Previous State]
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Power On/Off Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
Power Off Source
Software
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to enable the power to be turned
off using a program or the operating system.
Power Button
Power On Source
Remote
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to allow the use of the power
switch for turning the power off, when the ACPI
function is disabled.
• BIOS Controlled (at the
time of purchase)
• ACPI Controlled
Configures the power-on setting.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not the power is turned on when the
modem (connected to the serial port) receives a ring
signal.
LAN
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to enable the power to be turned
on via LAN.
Wake Up Timer
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not the power is turned on at a
certain time or after a certain time has passed. A
separate program is necessary for setting startup
time.
8
Wake Up Time
Wake Up Mode
Displays the startup time when using "Wake Up Timer".
Displays the startup mode when using "Wake Up Timer".
243
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
table: Items on the Power On/Off Submenu
Setting
• Always On
Item
Description
Power Failure Recovery
Sets whether to turn the power on or off after a
temporary main power outage due to power
interruption, etc.
• Always Off
• Previous State (at the
time of purchase)
Note:
ꢁ For UPS scheduled operation, set to [Always
On]. Otherwise, the power may not be turned
on at the specified time.
8.2.10IPMI Submenu
Configures server management settings.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
IPMI
Item Specific Help
nn%
SEL Load
[Disabled]
Clear System Event Log
Event Log Full Mode
BMC Time Sync
System Event Log
SDRR Browser
[Overwrite]
[Enabled]
>
>
>
LAN Setting
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the IPMI Submenu
Setting
Item
Description
SEL Load
Displays the usage of event log space as a percentage.
Clear System Event Log
Event Log Full Mode
• Disabled (at the time
of purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether or not to clear the event log.
• Overwrite
(at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to overwrite the event log when
space available for it becomes full.
Note:
• Maintain
ꢁ Changing this setting deletes the existing
event log. Before making changes, refer to
(ꢀpg.280) for saving the event log.
BMC Time Sync
Enabled (Fixed
parameter)
Synchronizes the internal clock of the Baseboard
Management Controller (BMC) with the system
time.
System Event Log
SDRR Browser
Displays the system event logs. Press the [Enter] key to display the system event
log window. Display previous and subsequent entries using [+] [-] keys.
Displays sensor information. The SDRR Browser is displayed by pressing [Enter].
244
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: Items on the IPMI Submenu
Setting
Item
LAN Setting
Description
Configure the network. Press the [Enter] key to display the [LAN Setting]
submenu. Set the following items.
Local IP address
-
Set the IP address of the onboard LAN.
Note:
ꢁ Set an IP address different from that in OS
settings.
Subnet mask
-
-
Set the subnet mask.
Gateway address
Set the default gateway.
8.2.11Security Menu
The [Security] menu sets the security options.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security Server Exit
Main
Advanced
Item Specific Help
Setup Password
System Password
Not installed
Not installed
Set Setup Password:
Setup Password Lock:
Set System Password:
System Password Mode:
[Press Enter]
[Standard]
[Press Enter]
[System]
System Load:
Setup Prompt:
Virus Warning:
[Standard]
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Diskette Write:
Flash Write:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Security Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Setup Password
Displays whether a user password (setup password) is set or not.
• Not Installed: A password has not been set.
• Installed: A password has been set.
System Password
Set Setup Password
Displays whether an administrator password (system password) is set or not.
• Not Installed: A password has not been set.
• Installed: A password has been set.
8
Sets a setup password.
Setting a setup password makes it necessary to enter the password in order to start
the BIOS Setup Utility.
Press the [Enter] key to display the password input window. Enter the setup
password. For more details, refer to "9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use"
(ꢀpg.285).
Setup Password Lock
• Standard (at the time of
purchase)
• Extended
Sets the scope protected by the setup password.
This setting is possible when a setup password is
specified.
245
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
table: Items on the Security Menu
Setting
Item
Description
Set System Password
Sets a system password.
Setting a system password makes it necessary to enter the password in order to
access this server.
A setup password must be specified.
Press the [Enter] key to display the password input window. Enter the setup
password. For more details, refer to "9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use"
System Password Mode
System Load
• System (at the time of
purchase)
• Keyboard
Sets the scope protected by the system password.
This setting is possible when a setup password and
system password are both specified.
• Standard (at the time of
purchase)
• Diskette/CDROM Lock
Sets whether to enable or disable system startup
from a floppy disk or CD-ROM.
Setup Prompt
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to display a setup message
"<F2>BIOS Setup/<F12>BOOT Menu" on the
[POST] window during system startup.
Virus Warning
Disabled (Fixed parameter) Sets whether or not to check the boot sector of the
hard disk drive after the previous system startup. If
the boot sector is changed without a clear reason, it
is necessary to scan the system for computer viruses
with a virus detection program.
Diskette Write
Flash Write
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to allow writing on a floppy
disk.
• Disabled
• Enabled (at the time of
purchase)
Sets whether or not to allow writing on the BIOS
Flash ROM.
246
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.2.12Server Menu
The [Server] menu sets the server options.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Advanced
Security
Server
Exit
O/S Boot Timeout:
Action:
[Disabled]
[Reset]
[0]
Item Specific Help
Timeout Value:
ASR&R Boot Delay:
Power Cycle Delay:
Boot Retry Counter:
Diagnostic System:
Temperature Monitoring:
Memory Scrubbing:
[2]
[5]
[3]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Enabled]
> CPU Status
> Memory Status
> Console Redirection
> RomPilot
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Select > Sub-Menu
table: Items on the Server Menu
Setting
Item
Description
O/S Boot Time out
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether to enable or disable the OS Boot
Monitoring function, when ServerView is installed to
the OS. When this function is enabled, if for some
reason booting the operating system is interrupted,
the system will automatically restart.
The OS Boot Monitoring function can also be
enabled or disabled from ServerView.
Note:
ꢁ If ServerView is not installed to the OS, be
sure to set to [Disabled]. If the setting is
enabled, the server may automatically turn off
or restart improperly.
ꢁ Even when ServerView is installed to the OS,
if starting the system while the ServerStart
CD-ROM or DOS floppy disk is inside, be sure
to disable the OS Boot Monitoring function. If
the system is started with this function
enabled, the server may automatically turn off
or restart improperly.
8
ꢁ When setting this function, refer to
"ServerView User’s Guide" to fully learn about
its specifications, in order to use it properly
with the correct settings.
Action
• Continue
Sets the operation when the OS did not boot
successfully within the time set with the [Timeout
Value] setting.
• Reset (at the time of
purchase)
• Power Cycle
Timeout Value
• 0 (at the time of purchase) Sets the timeout period in minutes.
• 1–100
247
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
table: Items on the Server Menu
Setting
Item
Description
ASR&R Boot Delay
• 2 (at the time of purchase) Sets the standby time for startup after shutdown due
• 1–30
to trouble (such as overheating) in minutes. The
system restarts after the set standby time.
Power Cycle Delay
Boot Retry Counter
Diagnostic System
Temperature Monitoring
5 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the time until the server is turned on after it is
turned off.
• 3 (at the time of purchase) Sets the maximum number of retries to boot the
• 0–7
operating system within the range of 0 to 7.
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to diagnose the BootDevice when
restarting with ASR&R.
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not the server can be turned on when
the temperature is not in its operating environment
range (10-35 °C).
Memory Scrubbing
Sets whether or not to correct errors of memory space
that is currently not used by the OS or application
programs.
CPU Status
Press the [Enter] key to display the "■ CPU Status Submenu" (ꢀpg.248) window.
Memory Status
Console Redirection
Press the [Enter] key to display the "■Memory Status Submenu" (ꢀpg.248) window.
Press the [Enter] key to display the "■ Console Redirection Submenu" (ꢀpg.249)
window.
Rom Pilot
Press the [Enter] key to display the "■ RomPilot Submenu" (ꢀpg.249) window.
■ CPU Status Submenu
This submenu sets whether or not to allow the use of the installed CPU.
table: Items on the CPU Status Menu
Item
CPU 0 Status
CPU 1 Status
Setting
Description
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to allow the use of CPUs installed
in CPU Sockets 0 and 1.
■ Memory Status Submenu
This submenu sets whether or not to allow the use of the installed memory.
table: Items on the Memory Status Menu
Item
Setting
Description
Memory Module 0A
Memory Module 0B
Memory Module 1A
Memory Module 1B
Memory Module 2A
Memory Module 2B
Enabled (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to allow the use of memory in
Memory Slots 0A to 2B.
248
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Console Redirection Submenu
This submenu configures detailed settings for console redirection.
table: Items on the Console Redirection Menu
Item
Setting
Description
Console Redirection
• Disabled (at the time of
purchase)
• Enabled
Sets whether to enable or disable console redirection.
When set to [Enabled] the following parameters
appear. Set each of them. If set to [Disabled], the
items are not displayed.
Port
• Serial1 (at the time of
purchase)
• Serial2
Sets the serial port to be used for console redirection.
Media Type
Baud Rate
• Serial (at the time of
purchase)
• LAN
Sets the connection type for console redirection.
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
Sets the speed of the console redirection connection
(in bps).
• 9600 (at the time of
purchase)
• 19.2K
• 38.4K
• 57.6K
• 115.2K
Protocol
• VT100
Sets the console type for console redirection.
• VT100,8bit
• PC-ANSI,7bit
• PC-ANSI
• VT100+ (at the time of
purchase)
Flow Control
Mode
• None
Sets flow control for console redirection.
Sets the range of use for console redirection.
• XON/XOFF
• CTS/RTS (at the time of
purchase)
• Standard
• Enhanced (at the time of
purchase)
■ RomPilot Submenu
The RomPilot is a remote console BIOS extended function.
This server cannot use this.
table: Item on the RomPilot Menu
Setting
Disabled (Fixed parameter)
8
Item
Description
RomPilot Support
Sets whether or not to use RomPilot.
249
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.2.13Exit Menu
This menu exits the BIOS Setup Utility.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security Server Exit
Main
Advanced
Item Specific Help
Save Changes & Exit
Discard Changes & Exit
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
-/+
Change Values
Help
Exit
F1
Esc
Select Item
Select Menu
Setup Defaults
Save and Exit
F9
F10
Enter Execute Command
Select the option for handling BIOS settings when exiting the utility.
table: Items on the Exit Menu
Item
Description
Save Changes & Exit
Save the current settings and exit the BIOS Setup Utility. After it exits the
server reboots.
Discard Changes & Exit
Get Default Values
Exits the BIOS Setup Utility without saving current settings. Previously
saved settings remain valid.
Returns to the server's initial values for all items. However, since there are
items that differ from the setting values at the time of purchase, after
returning to initial settings, it is necessary to change to the settings at the
time of purchase.
Load Previous Values
Sets all items to the values before the last changes by reading from CMOS.
Current setting values are discarded.
Initial BIOS settings and settings at the time of purchase
ꢁ
Some items of the initial BIOS settings and settings at the time of purchase are different. When
returning to the initial BIOS settings, set the following items to the values they were at the time of
purchase:
[POST Errors], [Fast Boot], [Quiet Boot], [MultiBoot for HDs]
[Serial 1], [Serial 2]
[CPU Timeout Counter], [CPU Halt Mode (C1E)], [NX Memory Protection], [Enhanced SpeedStep]
250
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3 SCSI Setup Utility
This section explains settings for the SCSI Setup Utility and items regarding each
setting.
8.3.1 Starting and Exiting the SCSI Setup Utility
The following explains how to start and exit the SCSI Setup Utility.
■ How to Start the SCSI Setup Utility
1
During server startup (POST), press the [Ctrl] + [C] keys while the message
"Press Ctrl-C to Start Symbios Configuration Utility..." is displayed on the
screen.
The SCSI Setup Utility starts up.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPT BIOS-IME-n.nn.nn
<Boot Adapter List> <Global Properties>
LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters
Adapter
PCI
Bus
Dev/
Func
Port
Number
IRQ
NVM
Boot
Order
LSI Logic
Control
RAID
Status
<1020/1030
<1020/1030
2
2
40>
41>
3000
3400
11
9
Yes
Yes
0
1
Enabled
Enabled
--
--
F1 =HELP
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+ =Change [Item]
Enter=Excute <Item>
Esc=Abort/Exit
F2 =Menu
2
Set items as necessary.
8
● Changing Settings
1
2
Use the [↑] [↓] [←] [→] keys to select the item whose setting is to be changed.
The [↓] and [↑] keys move the cursor up and down, and the [←] and [→] keys move the cursor to
the left and right.
Press the [Enter] key.
When an item with a submenu is selected, the submenu appears. When an item without a
submenu is selected, the setting is changed.
251
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
3
Operations on the submenu are the same as those on the [Main] menu.
Use the [↑] [↓] [←] [→] keys to select the item whose setting is to be changed. Press the [Enter]
key.
The setting to be changed is displayed.
For the setting to be changed, use the [↓] [↑] or [+] [–] keys to change the setting and press the
[Enter] key.
● Roles of Keys
table: List of Key Operations on the SCSI Setup Utility Window
Key
Roles of key
[↑] [↓] [←] [→]
[Home / End]
Moves the cursor.
[+] [–]
[Enter]
[Esc]
Changes the setting value of an item.
Selects an item. When the item has a submenu, the submenu is displayed.
Returns to the previous menu.
Pressing this key on the SCSI Setup Utility initial screen exits the SCSI
Setup Utility.
[F2]
Pressing this key from the [Main] menu moves the cursor to [Boot Adapter
List] or [Global Properties].
■ How to Exit the SCSI Setup Utility
1
Press the [Esc] key from the [Main] menu.
The [Exit] menu window appears.
2
Select the operation and press the [Enter] key.
To save configuration changes before exiting:
Select [Save Changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
The changes are saved and the SCSI Setup Utility closes.
To exit without saving configuration changes:
Select [Discard changes then exit this menu] and press the [Enter] key.
The changes are discarded and the SCSI Setup Utility closes.
252
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3.2 Main Menu
The [Main] menu is displayed when you start the SCSI Setup Utility.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPT BIOS-IME-n.nn.nn
<Boot Adapter List> <Global Properties>
LSI Logic Host Bus Adapters
Adapter
PCI
Bus
Dev/
Func
Port
Number
IRQ
NVM
Boot
Order
LSI Logic
Control
RAID
Status
<1020/1030
<1020/1030
2
2
40>
41>
3000
3400
11
9
Yes
Yes
0
1
Enabled
Enabled
--
--
F1 =HELP
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+ =Change [Item]
Enter=Excute <Item>
Esc=Abort/Exit
F2 =Menu
Use the [↓] [↑] [←] [→] keys to move the cursor to the menu where you want to change settings and
press the [Enter] key. The selected menu appears.
table: Items on the Main Menu
Item
Description
Adapter
PCI Bus
Dev/Func
Displays the name of the SCSI controller. On this server, "1020/1030" is displayed.
Displays the number of the PCI bus where the SCSI controller is connected.
Displays the PCI device/function of the SCSI controller. The five upper bits
represent the device and the three lower bits represent the function.
Port Number
IRQ
Displays the I/O port address of the SCSI controller.
Displays the IRQ (IRQ level) of the SCSI controller.
NVM
Displays whether or not the SCSI controller has NVRAM for storing settings. On
this server, "Yes" is displayed.
Boot Order
Displays the boot order of SCSI controllers. When the server starts up, startable
SCSI devices connected to SCSI cards (controllers) are searched for in ascending
numerical order.
SCSI devices start up in order of detection.
LSI Logic Control
RAID Status
Displays whether or not the SCSI controller can use standard device drivers.
The server does not support the RAID function.
8
253
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.3.3 Boot Adapter List
A list of Boot Adapters is displayed. Press the [F2] key from the [Main] menu window, select [Boot
Adapter List] and press the [Enter] key to display the window.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPT BIOS-IME-n.nn.nn
Boot Adapter List
Insert=Add an adapter
Delete=Remove an adapter
Adapter
PCI
Bus
2
2
DEV/
Func
40
Boot
Order
[0]
[0]
Current
Status
On
Next
Boot
[ON]
[ON]
1020/1030
1020/1030
41
On
Hit Insert to select an adapter from this list:
<1020/1030
<1020/1030
2
2
40>
41>
F1 =HELP
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+ =Change [Item]
Enter=Excute <Item>
table: Items on the Boot Adapter List Window
Setting
Item
Description
PCI Bus
Displays the number of the PCI bus where the SCSI controller is connected.
Displays the PCI device/function of the SCSI controller.
DEV/Func
Boot Order
Current Status
Next Boot
0 (Fixed parameter)
Sets the startup priority for SCSI controllers.
Displays whether the SCSI controller BIOS is enabled or disabled.
ON (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the SCSI
controller BIOS at the next startup.
254
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
8.3.4 Global Properties
A list of Boot Adapters is displayed. Press the [F2] key from the [Main] menu window, select [Global
Properties] and press the [Enter] key to display the window.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPT BIOS-IME-n.nn.nn
Global Properties
Pause When Boot Alert Displayed
Boot Information Display Mode
Negotiate with device
Video Mode
[No]
[Verbose]
[Supported]
[Color]
Support Interrupt
[Hook interrupt,the Default]
<Restore Defaults>
F1 =HELP
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+ =Change [Item]
Enter=Excute <Item>
table: Items on the Global Properties Window
Setting
Item
Description
Pause When Boot Alert
Displayed
No (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not the SCSI device scan at startup
stops when an error is detected.
Boot Information Display
Mode
Verbose (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to abridge the SCSI device
information displayed on the startup screen.
Negotiate with devices
Supported (Fixed
parameter)
Sets whether or not to set the transfer rate between
the SCSI card and SCSI devices.
Video Mode
Color (Fixed parameter)
Sets the screen color scheme to color or black-and-
white.
Support Interrupt
Restore Defaults
Hook interrupt the Default
(Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to support interruption
channels.
Reads default values for the controller.
8
255
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.3.5 Adapter Properties
Detailed configuration information of SCSI adapters on the SCSI bus is set. Press the [F2] key from the
[Main] menu window, select [Adapter] and press the [Enter] key to display the window.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPT BIOS-IME-n.nn.nn
Adapter
Adapter
Properties
PCI
Bus
2
DEV/
Func
40
41
1020/1030
1020/1030
2
<Device Properties>
<RAID Properties><Synchronize Whole Mirror>
Host SCSI ID
[ 7]
SCSI Bus Scan Order
Removable Media Support
CHS Mapping
[Low to High(0..Max)]
[None]
[SCSI Plug and Play Mapping]
Spinup Delay(Secs)
Secondary Cluster Server
Termination Control
[ 2]
[No]
[Auto]
<Restore Defaults>
F1 =HELP
Esc=Abort/Exit
ArrowKeys=Select Item
Home/End=Select Item
-/+ =Change [Item]
Enter=Excute <Item>
table: Items on the Adapter Properties Window
Item
Setting
Description
Host SCSI ID
7 (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the SCSI ID of the SCSI controller.
SCSI Bus Scan Order
Low to High (0..Max)
(Fixed parameter)
Specifies the SCSI bus scan order during the
startup.
Removable Media Support
CHS Mapping
None (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not the SCSI BIOS supports
removable disk units such as MO drives.
SCSI Plug and Play
Mapping (Fixed parameter)
Specifies the disk mapping method.
Spinup Delay (Secs)
• 2 (at the time of
purchase)
• 1–15
Specifies the interval between a server startup and
the start of disk rotation.
Secondary Cluster Server
Termination Control
Restore Defaults
No (Fixed parameter)
Auto (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether to enable or disable the secondary
cluster server.
Sets whether to enable or disable the terminator on
the system board.
Reads default values for the controller.
256
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Device Properties Submenu
Select [Device Properties] in the [Adapter Properties] window and press the [Enter] key to display the
submenu.
table: Items on the Device Properties Submenu
Item
Restore Defaults
MT/Sec
Setting
Description
Reads default values for the controller.
• 80 (at the time of
Sets the maximum transfer rate.
purchase)
• 40
• 20
• 10
• 5
• 0
MB/Sec
Displays the maximum transfer rate.
Data Width
• 16 (at the time of
purchase)
• 8
Specifies the maximum data transfer width.
Scan ID
• Yes (at the time of
purchase)
• No
Sets whether or not to scan this device at startup.
Scan LUNs > 0
DISCONNECT
• Yes (at the time of
purchase)
• No
Sets whether or not to scan LUN=1 and subsequent
LUNs at startup.
• On (at the time of
purchase)
• Off
Sets whether or not to permit disconnection during
command execution.
SCSI Timeout
QUEUE TAGS
10
Specifies the timeout period during command
execution.
• On (at the time of
purchase)
• Off
Sets whether or not to issue multiple commands to
devices at the same time.
■ RAID Properties Submenu
Select [RAID Properties] in the [Adapter Properties] window and press the [Enter] key to display the
submenu.
table: Items on the RAID Properties Submenu
Item
Array Disk?
Setting
Description
No (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to configure an array.
The server does not support this yet. Cannot be set.
8
Hot Spare
No (Fixed parameter)
Sets whether or not to configure a hot spare.
The server does not support this yet. Cannot be set.
257
Chapter 8 Configuring Hardware and Utilities
8.3.6 Formatting Hard Disks Physically
On this server, physical formatting cannot be performed from SCSI Setup Utility menus. When a hard
disk must be formatted physically, perform the following procedures to run the SCSI Low-Level Format
Utility.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Physical format deletes all data on the selected hard disk. Make a backup before using this function.
Physical format of a hard disk takes time. Once started, it cannot be aborted. Perform it when you have
enough time.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not turn off or reset the server during physical formatting. Otherwise, the hard disk may be
damaged.
The "Server Management Tools" disk attached to the server is required. Please have it ready.
■ Performing Physical Format
1
Insert the "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with this server and turn
the server on.
2
When a command prompt is displayed, enter the following command and press
the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>ASPIFMT.EXE
The SCSI Low-Level Format Utility starts up.
3
4
5
Use the [↑] [↓] keys to select the hard disk to be formatted physically. Press the
[Space] key to set it.
Press the [Tab] key to move to the [Format] button. Press the [Space] key.
A confirmation message is displayed.
Read the message, select [Format] again, and press the [Space] key.
Physical formatting starts.
When the physical formatting completes, a completion message appears.
6
7
Check that [Failed Formatting Drive(s)] indicates "none". Select [Exit] and press
the [Space] key.
Select [Exit] again and press the [Space] key.
The physical formatting has completed when a command prompt appears.
The server can be turned off.
258
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.1 Daily Maintenance
This section explains how to check the status of the operating server, as well as how
to perform daily maintenance.
9.1.1 Checking the Server Condition
■ Checking Each LED
This server is equipped with LEDs that display various hardware conditions.
Check the server status via each LED after starting the server. For positions and functions of each status
■ Server Monitoring Tool (ServerView)
ServerView is software to monitor that the server hardware is in a normal state to protect important
server resources. When using ServerView, the server hardware is monitored all the time. If an error that
could cause trouble is detected, the administrator is notified in real-time for early detection. This allows
the server administrator to remove a system error early and avoid trouble.
For an overview and installation of ServerView and other high reliability tools, refer to "1.2.2 High
■ Replacing a PSU or System Fan when the Power Supply Conversion
Kit is Used
Since the PSUs and system fans are redundant when the Power Supply Conversion Kit is used, the
system will not go down if one of them fails.
● When a PSU Fails
Use the status LED of the PSU or ServerView to check the PSU that failed. The faulty PSU can be
replaced without turning off the server. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact
your maintenance engineer and have it replaced as soon as possible. After removing the PSU, replace it
with a new unit. Do not continue to run the server with the PSU slot empty.
• When removing the PSU, do not insert your hand into the PSU slot. Doing so
can cause electric shock.
260
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● When a System Fan Fails
To verify the position of the faulty system fan, use ServerView or check the status LED of the system fan
in the server. For faulty fans, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer and have it replaced as soon as possible.
[CPU fan]
[System fan]
LED
On: Nomal
Off: Failure or uninstalled
9.1.2 Cleaning
• Before cleaning, turn off the server and unplug the power cables from the
outlets. Also power off peripherals and disconnect them from the server. Failure
■ Cleaning the Server
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. For stains that do not come off with a dry cloth, wipe with a cloth lightly
dampened with a mild detergent. Once the stain has been removed, wipe off any remaining detergent
with a cloth dampened with water. When wiping the server, be sure that no moisture enters the server
machine.
Do not use solvents. Use a mild detergent only. Otherwise, the server may be damaged.
Use a vacuum cleaner periodically to prevent dust buildup in ventilation holes.
ꢁ
In dusty environments, dust piles up on the front and rear panels of the server over short periods.
Install the server in a different location to avoid failures.
9
261
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Cleaning the Server Interior
In dusty environments, dust deposits in the server. Dust deposits may cause a server failure, fire, or
electric shock. To keep the PRIMERGY server in good condition, use a vacuum cleaner periodically to
remove dust deposits.
Cleaning components
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
CPUs: Dust deposits must be removed because it will impair the cooling performance.
Fans: Remove dust from and around the fans.
Memory/expansion cards: Remove dust between memory modules and between expansion cards.
Remove dust from the connector before adding a memory module or an expansion card.
Internal hard disk units/5-inch internal devices: Remove dust deposits from units and devices. Tape
devices are particularly susceptible to dust and may cause failures. Install them in a clean
environment.
ꢁ
• Do not disassemble the PSU when cleaning the server interior. Doing so can
cause failures or electric shock.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Be careful when removing components such as CPUs, memory modules, or hard disk units. Be sure to
install parts and cables in the original position.
Leaving dust brushed off or blown with air in the server can cause failure. Be sure to take it out of the
server.
■ Cleaning the Keyboard
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
■ Cleaning the Mouse
Wipe the surface with a soft, dry cloth. If the tracking ball does not spin or roll smoothly, remove the ball
and clean it.
● Cleaning Method
1
Remove the cover from the mouse.
Remove the cover under the mouse by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
262
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
3
4
Remove the ball and rinse it with water.
Flip the mouse over to remove the ball. Afterwards, wash it with water.
Clean the inside of the mouse.
Wipe the inside of the mouse, the roller, and the bottom cover with a damp cloth.
Roller
Insert the ball and apply the cover.
After the ball and inside of the mouse are dry, insert the ball and apply the cover.
■ Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive
Prolonged use of the floppy disk drive accumulates dust on the device head (the part which reads/writes
data). A dirty head can impair the ability to read/write data to/from a floppy disk correctly.
Clean the head once every three months.
● Cleaning Method
1
2
Insert the cleaning disk into the floppy disk drive.
Access the floppy disk drive from the OS.
• For Windows, access it via Explorer.
• For Linux, execute the "mount" or "dd" commands of the floppy disk drive.
The process is completed when an error message such as indicating that the disk cannot be read is
displayed.
9
3
Remove the cleaning disk from the floppy disk drive.
263
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Optional Devices
For cleaning optional devices, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and
"Supplement" supplied with options.
264
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.2 Troubleshooting
This section explains the resolutions when the server is not running properly or when
error messages are displayed.
For each situation, refer to the following. If the problem is not resolved after
performing the following troubleshooting, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start
Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
When contacting your maintenance engineer, refer to "9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance
Support" (ꢀPg.298) and collect the required information.
•
•
•
Hardware problems: "9.2.1 Hardware Troubleshooting"
Error messages: "9.2.2 Error Messages"
Software problems: "9.2.3 Software Troubleshooting"
9.2.1 Hardware Troubleshooting
This section explains hardware related troubleshooting. If it does not operate properly or if a failure is
suspected, check the following.
For optional devices, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement"
supplied with options.
■ Server
● The server does not power on, or the power LED on the front of the server
does not light up.
Check to see whether the power cable is properly connected to the outlet. For instructions on connecting
the power cable, refer to "Start Guide".
● The access LED does not light up.
When using the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3), the hard disk access LED does not
turn on. Check the hard disk access LED of the internal disk unit.
If the RAID Ctrl 2-Channel 128MB w/ BBU (PG-142E3) is not being used, there may be a failure in the
server. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
When contacting your maintenance engineer, refer to "9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance Support"
(ꢀPg.298) and collect the required information.
● When an expansion card is added, other expansion cards or onboard
devices are not recognized.
9
Install the drivers for the expansion cards or onboard devices that are not recognized.
265
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
● The server does not recognize the connected RS-232C device.
•
Check whether serial port 1 has been set to be used as a server management port. Through
configuration with the BIOS Setup Utility, Serial Port 1 on the server can be used as a server
management port. In this configuration, RS-232C devices cannot be connected to Serial Port 1. For
details about how to use the server management port, refer to "Appendix C Using the Server
Management Port" (ꢀPg.306)
•
In this server, when performing console redirection using the ServerView RemoteControleService,
connect the UPS and external modems, etc. to serial connector 2 (COM2). For details about the
RemoteControlService function, refer to "Chapter 5 Using RemotConsoleService" in the
"ServerView User’s Guide".
● A temperature warning is output to the hardware event log and OS event log,
or ServerView issues a notification of a temperature warning such as by a
popup message.
The above log is output or the above notification is issued by ServerView when the ambient temperature
is within 30 to 35 °C, which is near the upper limit of the temperature boundaries (10 to 35 °C). This is
to notify the administrator before the ambient temperature actually exceeds the range of the temperature
boundaries.
Although continued use within the temperature boundaries poses no problems within itself, reconsider
the surrounding environment conditions if this log is output or if ServerView issues this notification.
● Serial ports are not recognized properly in Device Manager.
This may occur when the Serial 1 and Serial 2 settings are changed with "8.2.6 Peripheral Configuration
Submenu" (ꢀPg.238) in the [Advanced] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility.
If this occurs, delete all serial ports in Device Manager and restart the system.
● POST stops, generating the "Expansion ROM not initialized..." message.
Utility.
■ Display
● The display does not power on.
Check to see whether the power cable of the display is properly connected to the outlet. For details, refer
to "Start Guide" or the manual of the display.
● Nothing is displayed on the screen.
•
•
Check to see whether the display cable is connected properly. If it is not connected, turn the server off
and then connect the cable. For the connection location, refer to "Start Guide".
The brightness volume or contrast volume of the display may not be adjusted correctly. If they need
to be adjusted, perform the necessary adjustments.
For details, refer to the manual of the display.
•
There may be an error in the system area of the memory. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start
Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
266
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Typing the keyboard does not display any characters, or the mouse cursor
does not move.
Check to see whether the keyboard and mouse are connected properly. If they are not connected, turn the
server off and then connect the cables to the server. For the connection location, refer to "Start Guide".
● The screen shakes.
If a device that produces a strong magnetic field such as a television or speaker is near the display, place
them further away from the display.
The display may also shake if a nearby cell-phone receives a call. Do not use a cell-phone near the
display.
● The screen display is distorted.
The screen display may be distorted during 3D program execution or the 3D program may terminate
abnormally. If this occurs, set Color quality in screen properties to anything other than True Color (32
bits).
■ Floppy Disk Drive
● Cannot read or write to the floppy disk.
The head may be dirty. Clean the drive using a cleaning disk. For cleaning methods, refer to "9.1.2
Cleaning" (ꢀPg.261).
● Cannot write to the floppy disk.
The write protection of the floppy disk may be applied.
Flip the switch on the disk to allow writing.
■ CD-ROM Drive Unit
● Cannot read data.
•
Check to see whether the CD-ROM is inserted properly. If it is not inserted, correctly insert the CD-
ROM so that the label is facing up.
•
•
The CD-ROM may be dirty. If it is dirty, wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
The CD-ROM may be scratched or bent. If scratched or damaged, replace the CD-ROM.
● The unit does not operate properly.
Check to see whether the internal cable is connected properly. If it is not connected, correctly connect
the internal cable.
9
267
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ SCSI Device (Internal/External)
● The unit does not operate properly.
•
•
Check to see whether the internal cable is connected properly. If it is not connected, correctly connect
the internal cable. For the connection location, refer to "7.7.2 Installable 5-inch Internal Devices and
Notes" (ꢀPg.215).
For SCSI devices, check to see whether the SCSI ID and terminator are set correctly. If they are not
set, correctly set the SCSI ID and terminator.
9.2.2 Error Messages
■ POST Error Messages
This section explains error messages of Power On Self Test (POST: a device check performed during the
server startup).
If an error occurs during POST, the following messages are displayed.
ꢁ
When checking/changing the settings of the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to "8.2 BIOS Setup Utility"
(ꢀPg.231).
ꢁ
ꢁ
For instructions on checking peripheral connections, refer to "Start Guide".
For details on installing hardware options, refer to "Chapter 7 Installing Hardware Options" (ꢀPg.173).
table: List of POST Errors
Message
Failure Fixed Disk 0
Description
The IDE device is abnormal. From the BIOS Setup Utility,
check the [IDE Drive1 - 4] setting of the [Main] menu or the
[Local Bus IDE adapter] setting of the [Advanced] menu ->
[Peripheral Configuration] submenu. If the message still
appears, the baseboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
Failure Fixed Disk 1
Fixed Disk Controller Failure
Keyboard error
The Keyboard is abnormal. Check to see whether the keyboard
is connected properly. If the message still appears, the
keyboard must be replaced.
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch
Keyboard controller error
The keyboard controller is abnormal. Replace the keyboard or
mouse. If the message still appears, the baseboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Keyboard error nn
Stuck Key nn
The key entry is invalid. If something is pressing the keyboard
keys, remove it. ("nn" is a hexadecimal code representing a
key.) Check to see whether the keyboard is connected properly.
If the message still appears, the keyboard must be replaced.
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run
Setup
The baseboard is abnormal. It must be replaced. Refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer.
268
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: List of POST Errors
Message
Description
Critical memory error occurred - system halted The memory is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it back
on. If the message still appears, check the error log and replace
the faulty memory.
Extended RAM Failed at offset: nnnn
System RAM Failed at offset: nnnn
Shadow RAM Failed at offset: nnnn
Memory type mixing detected
The installation configuration of the memory is wrong. Verify
that the same type of memory is installed to the slots of the
same bank. If the message displays even though the installation
is correct, replace the memory.
Hot Spare Memory Feature could not be
enabled
The hot spare memory function cannot be enabled.
Check that all the memory modules that are installed are all of
the same capacity. If the message still appears even though the
installation is correct, the memory or baseboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Correctable memory error in module x
Uncorrectable memory error in module x
Memory decreased in Size
The memory is abnormal. Replace the memory module that
corresponds to "module x" (where x is the slot number).
The memory is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it back
on. If the message still appears, check the error log and replace
the faulty memory.
One or more RDRAM devices are not used
The memory is abnormal. If memory that is not supported by
this server is installed, replace it with supported memory.
One or more RDRAM devices have bad
architecture/timing
One or more RDRAM devices are disabled
There are more than 32 RDRAM devices in the
system
Non Fujitsu Siemens Memory Module detected The memory is abnormal. Check to see that the jumper pin
Warranty void!
settings or BIOS Setup Utility settings are correct. If the
message still appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer.
System battery is dead - Replace and run
SETUP
The battery is abnormal. Refer to "Contact Information" in
"Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
System CMOS checksum bad - Default
configuration used
The CMOS setting is invalid. Correct the current settings with
the BIOS Setup Utility or restore the settings at the time of
purchase. If the message still appears, the keyboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Password checksum bad- Passwords cleared
System timer error
The set password is incorrect. Reset the password using the
BIOS Setup Utility.
The system clock is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it
back on. If the message still appears, the keyboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Real time clock error
The Real Time Clock (RTC) is abnormal. Start the BIOS Setup
Utility and then enter the current time. If the message still
appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
9
269
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
table: List of POST Errors
Message
Description
Check date and time settings
The set date and time is invalid. Start the BIOS Setup Utility
and then enter the current date and time. If the message still
appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
Previous boot incomplete - Default
configuration used
POST did not complete during the last startup. Be sure to
perform the following operation. Failure to do so can result in
the OS not starting or the server not operating correctly.
1. Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
2. From the [Exit] menu, select [Save Changes & Exit] and
press the [Enter] key.
The message "Save configuration changes and exit
now?" is displayed.
3. Select [Yes] and press the [Enter] key.
The BIOS Setup Utility closes and the server restarts.
Memory Size found by POST differed from
EISA CMOS
EISA CMOS is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it back
on. If the message still appears, the keyboard must be replaced.
Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact
your maintenance engineer.
CPU mismatch detected
The CPU frequency or the number of CPUs has changed.
If the correct CPU is installed and the message is displayed,
select [Yes] for the [Reset Configuration Data] setting under
the [Advanced] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message
still appears, the CPU or baseboard must be replaced. Refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer.
Available CPUs do not support the same bus
frequency- system halted
CPUs with varying frequencies are installed. Install the correct
CPUs. If the message still appears, the keyboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Diskette drive A error
The floppy disk drive is abnormal. Check to see whether the
floppy disk drive cable is connected properly. Also check the
settings of [Diskette A] or [Diskette B] from the [Main] menu
of the BIOS Setup Utility.
Diskette drive B error
Incorrect Drive A - run SETUP
Incorrect Drive B - run SETUP
System Cache Error - Cache disabled
The system cache is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it
back on. If the message still appears, check the error log and
replace the CPU if it is at fault. Or the baseboard must be
replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
System memory exceeds the CPU's caching
limit
EISA CMOS not writable
DMA Test Failed
Power off the server and turn it back on. If the message still
appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
Software NMI Failed
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed
Verify CPU Frequency selection in Setup
The CPU is abnormal. Power off the server and turn it back on.
If the message still appears, check the error log and replace the
CPU if it is at fault. If the message still appears, the keyboard
must be replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start
Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
270
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
table: List of POST Errors
Message
Description
System Management Configuration changed
The hardware configuration changed or is invalid. If this is
displayed right after changing the hardware configuration,
disregard it. If the same message is displayed again, check the
cable connections, and then select [Yes] for the [Reset
Configuration Data] setting under the [Advanced] menu of the
BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still appears, refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer.
Invalid System Configuration Data
The system configuration is invalid. Select [Yes] for the [Reset
Configuration Data] setting under the [Advanced] menu of the
BIOS Setup Utility.
Invalid System Configuration Data - run
configuration utility
The system chassis has been opened.
The hard disk cover or side cover is open. Close the cover.
The system performed an emergency
shutdown.
The system shut down due to some reason; refer to the event
log for details.
Manually-operated Retention Latch is not
closed at Hot-Plug PCI slot n
The baseboard is abnormal.
It must be replaced. Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start
Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
CNR Plug and Play EEPROM contents are
damaged.
A CNR error.
CNR version newer than motherboard, some
CNR functionality may be lost.
CNR and AC97 Version do not match, AC97
functionality of CNR ignored.
Illegal AC97 configuration, AC97 Audio and
Modem functions disabled.
Illegal AC97 configuration, AC97 Modem
function disabled.
CNR LAN Interface not compatible with
Motherboard, LAN function disabled.
USB version required by the CNR is not
supported by the motherboard. The CNR USB
functions will operate at lower spe
CNR EEPROM PCI Configuration data size
mismatch
BIOS update for installed CPU failed
Check that the correct CPUs are installed. If the correct CPU is
installed and the message is displayed, select [Yes] for the
[Reset Configuration Data] setting under the [Advanced] menu
of the BIOS Setup Utility. If the message still appears, the CPU
or baseboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact Information"
in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
Patch for installed CPU not loaded. Please run
the bios flash update diskette.
CPU ID n failed
CPU ID n is abnormal (where "n" represents the CPU number).
Select [Disabled] for the [CPU Status] setting under the
[Server] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility. Afterwards, replace
the faulty CPU.
Invalid NVRAM media type
The NVRAM is abnormal.
9
Power off the server and turn it back on. If the message still
appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
Missing or invalid NVRAM token
271
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
table: List of POST Errors
Message
Description
Operating system not found
The OS to start cannot be found.
Check to see whether a floppy disk is unnecessarily inserted,
whether the cables of each device are connected correctly, or
whether the hard disk was successfully accessed during POST.
Also, start the BIOS Setup Utility and check the [Boot
Sequence] setting of the [Boot Option]. If the message still
appears, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
Parity Check 1
Power off the server and turn it back on. If the message still
appears, the keyboard must be replaced. Refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance
engineer.
Parity Check 2
Service Processor not properly installed
Unknown PCI Error
The PCI is abnormal. Disregard this message if it is displayed
when pressing the NMI switch in MS-DOS. Otherwise, refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your
maintenance engineer.
272
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Server Management Tools Error Messages
The following error messages may appear while executing Server Management Tools. In such cases,
perform the corresponding resolutions. If messages other than the following are displayed, refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
table: List of Server Management Tools Error Messages
Message
Description
Write protect error writing drive A.
Abort, Retry, Fail?
The inserted floppy disk is write-protected. Disable the
write-protect, and then press the [R] key.
Not ready writing drive A.
Abort, Retry, Fail?
The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk ("Server
Management Tools" disk), and then press the [R] key.
ERROR:Fail to create data file.
The following are possible causes. Check the floppy
disk status again.
• The floppy disk is write-protected. Disable the
write-protect and retry.
ERROR:Fail to write 1st CMOS data into data file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write 2nd CMOS data into data file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write ESCD data into the data file. nn
• The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk, and then retry.
• The floppy disk contains abnormal contents. Create
"Server Management Tools" again. If this occurred
while recovering BIOS information, configure the
information using the BIOS Setup Utility. Then store
the BIOS information.
ERROR:Fail to write SEEPROM data into the data file.
nn
ERROR:Fail to open data file.
The file for recovering the BIOS information does not
exist on this floppy disk. Insert the floppy disk on
which the BIOS information was stored, and then retry.
ERROR:Fail to write 1st CMOS data into system. nn
The following are possible causes. Check the floppy
disk status again.
ERROR:Fail to write 2nd CMOS data into system file.
nn
• The floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy disk
drive. Insert the proper floppy disk, and then retry.
• A different model or an unsupported version of
BIOS information. Insert the proper floppy disk, and
then retry.
ERROR:Fail to write ESCD data into system file. nn
ERROR:Fail to write SEEPROM data into system. nn
• The floppy disk contains abnormal contents. Create
"Server Management Tools" again. If this occurred
while recovering BIOS information, configure the
information using the BIOS Setup Utility. Then store
the BIOS information.
Other messages
Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and
contact your maintenance engineer.
9
273
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.2.3 Software Troubleshooting
This section explains software related troubleshooting. For troubles during OS installation or system
operation, refer to the following contents.
■ Trouble at a ServerStart Startup
● After a boot from the ServerStart CD-ROM, nothing is displayed on the
screen.
This problem may occur if the hard disk drive still contains previous information. In that case, this
problem will still occur when the Windows Server 2003 Installation CD-ROM is inserted.
To eliminate this problem, physically format the hard disk drive to delete the previous information and
start up ServerStart. For physical formatting, refer to "8.3.6 Formatting Hard Disks Physically"
(ꢀPg.258) or "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, or "Supplement" supplied with
options.
■ Trouble during OS Installation
● Automatic logon is not performed during Windows 2000 setup.
During OS installation, ServerStart installs applications and hardware utilities supplied with the OS.
Installation and subsequent restart and logon are performed automatically as necessary. In rare cases,
however, automatic logon is not performed and the logon window appears. In this widow, logon the user
name and password you have set before starting installation. After logon, the setup procedures are
continued.
● Automatic installation stopped at an entry screen during Active Directory
configuration.
If automatic installation has stopped during Active Directory configuration, check the error message
first. Automatic installation can stop when the password is required, such as when registration in DNS
fails. Check the environment and continue the installation manually. If the problem is not solved, click
[Cancel] and after the OS installation, manually configure Active Directory.
If you have continued the Active Directory installation wizard manually, the following message appears
when the installation wizard closes.
It is necessary to restart Windows before making any changes made in
the "Active Directory installation wizard valid."
When this message appears, click [Restart] to continue the installation.
274
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Error Messages during Installation
The following error messages may appear during installation using ServerStart. Check the corrective
action against the relevant error.
● "WzDiskAdmin: System Error! ......................... , Last Error: Device
preparations are not complete. " is displayed
Optional SCSI devices (e.g., hard disk cabinet or DAT unit) may be connected. Disconnect the optional
SCSI devices and perform installation again. Connect the optional devices after the installation
completes.
● "WzDiskAdmin: Partition detected! Please delete all partition before starting
Configuration" is displayed
Run the guided or preconfiguration mode again. Check [Delete all partitions on the displayed disk] in
the disk wizard.
● "WzRaid: RAID arrays detected! Please delete all RAID arrays before starting
Configuration" is displayed
Use the ServerStart floppy disk you have created. Check [Delete existing RAID array] or select [Use
existing array] in the RAID wizard.
● "Operating System not found" appears when the system restarts after file
copy from the CD-ROM
The following problems should be considered. Check the settings.
•
•
The array controller card comes later than the onboard SCSI in order of device startup.
The Active flag is specified.
● "Missing Operating System" appears during installation
The installation partition size may be too large. Specify the installation partition size correctly.
For details on the installation partition size, refer to "2.3.1 Installation Partition Size" (ꢀPg.49).
● "Error 1920. Service (PXE Services) failed to start" appears during
preconfigured installation
The system installed with the preconfigured settings (PXE server) may not be connected to the network.
Check the LAN cable connection and click [Rerun].
9
275
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Error Window Appears after LAN Driver Installation (on Windows
Server 2003)
The following window may appear when the installation of the LAN driver to the [Ethernet controller]
under [Other devices] starts.
This is because the LAN driver for the network adapter recognized immediately after the OS installation
is not updated.
Clicking [Finish] in this window displays the [Help and Support Center] window. Click [X] to close this
window.
The "!" mark is displayed at the LAN device name in Device Manager. Device names are displayed
properly when all LAN drivers are installed and the system is restarted.
For details on LAN driver installation, refer to "4.3.1 Installing the LAN Driver (Windows Server
2003)" (ꢀPg.127).
■ Error Message Appears during LAN Driver Installation and LAN does
not Operate Properly
A conflict may have occurred between system resources including the LAN and other expansion cards.
Delete all LAN drivers and check that conflicts between system resources do not exist. Then, restart the
system and reinstall the LAN drivers. For the LAN driver installation procedure, refer to "4.3 Installing
the LAN Driver" (ꢀPg.127).
276
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Event Log Errors after Installation
After installation, the following events may be displayed in Event Viewer. Check and perform the
corrective action against the relevant event.
table: List of Event Log Errors That Can Occur after Installation
ID
62
Description
Cause and corrective action
This computer is a domain PDC at the
root of forest.
Cause:
An NTP was selected as a component.
Corrective action:
Use the net command "net time /
setsntp:<server name>" to configure it
for synchronization from an external
time source.
ServerStart cannot configure the NTP server due to the
absence of items for specifying it. After OS installation,
perform the following procedure to specify the time server.
1. Start SNTP server operation on another machine.
Assume that the SNTP server address is
<172.22.78.246>.
2. Enter the following at a command prompt.
net time /setsntp:172.22.78.246
w32tm -s 172.22.78.246
1000
The user or computer name cannot be
identified. The return value is "1722".
Cause:
The primary DNS server address may be invalid or the server
cannot be connected.
Corrective action:
Perform the following procedure to correct the DNS address in
Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.
1. Right-click [My Network] and click [Properties].
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click
[Properties].
3. Click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click
[Properties].
4. Enter the correct DNS address in the [Primary DNS
server] box.
■ Cannot Collect the Memory Dump
If the memory dump file cannot be created, perform the following procedures.
● Correcting the settings
If the memory dump cannot be collected, check the settings of the paging file and memory dump file.
● Collecting memory dump to other than the system drive
If the memory dump was set to be collected to the system drive (C:\), change the settings so that the
memory dump can be saved to a drive other than the system drive.
If only the system drive exists, or if there is no free space in any of the drives, perform one of the
following:
•
•
Adding a hard disk
9
Replacing with a larger hard disk
277
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
● Reducing the installed memory to collect the memory dump
There must be enough free disk space that matches the size of the installed memory; therefore, reduce
the installed memory to a collectable size.
Check the memory dump settings when changing the installed memory size.
● Changing the write type of the debugging information
If the memory dump cannot be collected, select a write type of debugging information within the range
of free space of the volume size.
If the above does not provide a solution, try increasing the size of the hard disk or adding an additional
hard disk.
■ Restoring the System
In the event where the system file, system configuration, or environment changes during startup are
corrupted, use the repair information stored on the repair disk created at the installation to restore the
system.
For restoration procedures, refer to the following:
•
•
■ Failed in Remote Installation
If remote installation fails, check the following.
● Checking Services
Check that the DHCP, PXE Service, and TFTP Service are running.
● Setting TFTP
To access TFTP Service, add a Guest account to the TFTP folder and set appropriate access rights.
● Checking Network Function Settings
The server must support network startup (PXE). Network startup must be enabled in advance.
● Checking the MAC Address
Check that the current MAC address is the correct MAC address of the server.
● Checking LAN Cable Connection
Check that the LAN cable is connected to the LAN card corresponding to the specified MAC address
and that the LAN card is connected to the network.
278
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ SNMP Service does not Startup
Regardless of whether the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is installed, if the SNMP
service is not started, perform the following procedure to start the SNMP service:
1
2
3
4
Click [Start] → [Management tools] → [Computer Management] in this order.
Select [Services] from the [Services and Applications] menu.
From the details, select [SNMP Service].
Select [Start] from the [Action] menu.
ꢁ
To have the service automatically start each time the OS starts, double-click [SNMP Service]
from the details, and select [Automatic] for the [Startup type] setting of the [SNMP Service
Properties] window.
■ Time Display in Linux OS Environment
● Difference in Time between the OS and the Hardware Clock
During OS operation in a Linux environment, the software clock on the OS, rather than the hardware
clock in the server, is used to display the time.
This may cause a difference in time between the OS and the hardware clock.
When you want to see the accurate time on the OS, it is recommended to use the NTP service to
periodically correct the time displayed on the OS.
● Changing the Time Settings for the OS and Hardware Clock
In a Linux environment, the time displayed on the OS (the software clock value on the OS) is written to
the hardware clock in the server when the OS is shut down.
•
Procedure for prohibiting the time on the OS from being written to the hardware clock
When you do not want the time on the OS to be written to the hardware clock at an OS shutdown,
comment the following line out in /etc/rc0.d/S01halt.
runcmd $"Syncing hardware clock to system time" /sbin/hwclock $CLOCKFLAGS
↓
#runcmd $"Syncing hardware clock to system time" /sbin/hwclock $CLOCKFLAGS
Procedure for reflecting the hardware clock value to the time on the OS
To reflect the hardware clock value to the software clock value on the OS, run the following
command.
•
>hwclock --hctosys
9
279
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.3 System Event Log
To operate system event log, use Server Management Tools.
ꢁ
When the area for writing to the system event log is full, the server is set to automatically overwrite
[Advanced] menu of the BIOS Setup Utility.
9.3.1 How to Use Server Management Tools
This section explains how to use Server Management Tools.
Server Management Tools performs the following to the system event log of the Baseboard Management
Controller (BMC: a micro-controller used for managing the baseboard environment, such as its
temperature and voltage sensors).
•
•
•
Viewing the system event log
Saving the system event log
Deleting the system event log
When a system event log occurs, save the log using Server Management Tools and refer to "Contact
Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
ꢁ
ꢁ
The Server Management Tools disk supplied with this server is exclusively for this server. Do not use it
on other systems. If used it may cause damage to the system.
Server Management Tools must be used when the server is started using the startup method
discussed below. If started up from other floppy disks or hardware disks do not use these tools.
Otherwise, the system may be corrupted.
ꢁ
Do not eject the floppy disk when the floppy disk access LED is on. Doing so may destroy the data on
the floppy disk.
■ Starting Server Management Tools
ꢁ
Before rebooting the system from the "Server Management Tools" disk, first check that the ServerView
"OS Boot Monitoring" function has been disabled (default setting is "Disabled").
If the system is started with this function enabled, the server may automatically turn off or restart
improperly.
If the "OS Boot Monitoring" function is needed, it should be reset to enabled before resuming normal
server operation. For details about ServerView, refer to the "ServerView User’s Guide".
1
Insert the "Server Management Tools" disk supplied with this server and turn
the power on.
The system will boot from the floppy disk and the DOS prompt is displayed.
280
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
2
Enter the following command and press the [Enter] key.
A:\SMTOOL\>IPMIVIEW.EXE
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
FUJITSU
SIEMENS
IPMI-Tool - Vn.nn
COMPUTERS
General Information
Temperature Information
Fan Information
Voltage Information
Powersupply Information
System Event Log (SEL)
FRU Information (ID Proms)
User Management
LAN Configuration
FSC/System Specific Functions
<
> Select
<ENTER> Start
<ESC> Exit
ꢁ
Only the following functions are supported by Server Management Tools:
• System Event Log (SEL)
• User Management
• LAN Configuration
■ Exiting Server Management Tools
1
Press the [Esc] key in the menu window of Server Management Tools.
The power can be turned off when the DOS prompt is displayed.
9
281
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.3.2 Viewing the System Event Log
Viewing the system event log is performed from System Event Log (SEL) of Server Management Tools.
1
2
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
When the [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window is displayed, check the event log list.
FUJITSU
SIEMENS
SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)
COMPUTERS
004 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] ****************************************
003 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] ****************************************
002 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] ****************************************
001 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] ****************************************
000 MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS [*****] ****************************************
<
,PgUp/Dn,(Ctrl-)Home/End> Move <F2> SaveToFile <F3> Clear <ESC> Exit
3
4
Use the following key operations to scroll the window and check the contents.
[↓], [↑], [←], [→], [Page Up], [Page Down], [Ctrl] + [Home], [Ctrl] + [End]
To exit the system event log, press the [Esc] key.
9.3.3 Saving/Deleting the System Event Log
When the system event log is full, the oldest log is overwritten with the newest log. Periodically check
the system event log and save/delete as necessary.
■ Saving the System Event Log
1
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
2
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
The [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window appears.
3
Press the [F2] key.
282
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
4
Enter the name of the file to save the system event log to, and press the [Enter]
key.
The system event log is saved to the floppy disk under the specified file name.
■ Deleting the System Event Log
1
Start Server Management Tools.
The menu window of Server Management Tools appears.
2
Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to select [System Event Log (SEL)], and press the
[Enter] key.
The [SYSTEM EVENT LOG (SEL)] window appears.
3
4
Press the [F3] key.
A confirm delete window appears.
Press the [Enter] key.
This deletes the system event log.
ꢀ
Selecting [System Event Log (SEL)] right after deleting the system event log will result in an error.
Allow approximately 10 seconds to select it normally.
9
283
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.4 Security
Security features are provided in order to protect the server hardware and software
from theft. Additional security functions, which prevent unauthorized use, provided by
the BIOS Setup Utility are also available to help maintain a highly reliable data
security system.
9.4.1 Hardware Security
Lock the drive and side covers to protect the hardware (hard disks and 5-inch internal devices) in the
server from theft or tampering.
Keep the side cover locked during normal use.
Turn the key clockwise to lock the cover.
[Front]
[Rear]
Drive cover key
Side cover key
ꢀ
Do not lose the drive cover and side cover keys. If the key is lost, refer to "Contact Information" in
"Start Guide", and contact your maintenance engineer.
ꢀ
ꢀ
284
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
■ Rack Type
Lock the rack door to protect the hardware in the rack from theft or tampering.
To close the rack door, shut the door and return the rack handle, and turn the rack key.
Rack handle
Rack key
Key hole
ꢀ
Do not lose the rack key. If the key is lost, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact
your maintenance engineer.
ꢀ
ꢀ
The above explanation is based on the 40U standard rack. For details on other rack systems, refer to
their respective manuals.
9.4.2 Security against Unauthorized Use
A password can be set to prevent unauthorized use of the server.
Setting a password makes it necessary to enter the password in order to access the server. Without the
password, the server cannot be used.
■ Password Types
There are two types of passwords that define the privileges of server operations.
● User Password
The password required to use the server. Unless the set password is entered, part of the BIOS setup
cannot be accessed and the OS cannot be booted.
9
● Administrator Password
This is the password that only allows the administrator to access the BIOS setup. Unless the set
password is entered, the BIOS setup cannot be accessed and the OS cannot be booted.
285
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
■ Setting a Password
The password is set in the BIOS Setup Utility. For details on the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to "8.2.11
Security Menu" (ꢁPg.245).
1
2
Start the BIOS Setup Utility.
Select the [Security] menu and select the type of password to set.
• For the administrator password, move the cursor to [Set Setup Password] and press the [Enter]
key.
• For the user password, move the cursor to [Set System Password] and press the [Enter] key.
3
4
When the password input window is displayed, enter the password to set.
Set Setup(System) Password:
Enter New Password
Confirm New Password
[
[
]
]
Enter the password
Enter the password again for confirmation
Press the [Enter] key.
This sets the password.
● Changing/Deleting Passwords
If a password is already set, perform the above password setting operations to display the password
change window.
•
To change the password, perform the following settings and press the [Enter] key.
Set Setup(System) Password:
Enter the current password
Enter Current Password
Enter New Password
[
[
[
]
]
]
Enter the new password
Confirm New Password
Enter the new password again for confirmation
•
To delete the password, enter the current password, and then press the [Enter] key without entering
anything in the second and third fields. The status of [Setup (System) Password] changes to [Not
installed].
ꢀ
The system shuts down after three invalid password entries. If this happens, turn off the server, turn it
back on, and then enter the correct password.
ꢀ
If you forgot your password and cannot start the server, change the switch block setting on the
baseboard to reset the passwords. For switch block settings, refer to "8.1 Switch Settings" (ꢁPg.230).
286
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.4.3 Security When Disposing the Server
■ Notes regarding the Deletion of Data from the Hard Disk When
Disposing or Transferring the Server
When disposing or transferring a server that has been used, the data in the hard disk may be read and
used unscrupulously. To prevent confidential or important data from leaking out, the data on the hard
disk must be wiped before disposing or transferring the server.
However, wiping the hard disk is not an easy task. Simply initializing (formatting) the hard disk or
deleting the files may give the pretense that the data no longer exists, but in reality the data is simply no
longer accessible to the OS, and it is still accessible to malicious individuals that can restore the data.
Therefore, if confidential or important data is saved to the hard disk, in addition to the operations
mentioned above, it is recommended to use third-party tools or services to wipe the data completely
from the disk to prevent its restoration.
When disposing or transferring the server, it is the customer’s responsibility to wipe data contained in
the hard disk in order to prevent such important data from leaking.
Also, if software license agreements prohibit unauthorized distribution of software (OS or application
software), transferring the server without removing the software may violate the license agreements.
These issues must be taken into consideration.
9
287
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.5 Backup
This server utilizes high-reliability components and hard disks, however, as a
precautionary measure, it is recommended that periodic backups be taken of the
data.
9.5.1 Importance of Backups
A backup of data stored on the server is required for data restoration in the event of server trouble
resulting in a system failure or accidental data loss due to operational errors. If the data on the server is
backed up, it can be restored from the backup in the event of hardware failures or data corruption in hard
disks due to operational errors. If backups are not made, restoration is impossible and data will be
permanently lost. To prepare for unexpected problems, be sure to perform periodic backups of the
system.
9.5.2 Backup Devices, Software and Their Operations
Backup operations differ depending on network operating systems, applications, and system operations.
Refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your sales representative and make backups
using the following items.
•
•
Backup device (e.g., DAT72 unit)
Backup software
(Standard backup software supplied with the OS, e.g., ARCserve, Changer Option)
Backup operations (schedules)
•
Use our genuine backup devices and software. Observe the backup medium (tape) storage conditions.
ꢀ
Mirroring/disk array systems
To improve system reliability, a mirroring or disk array system using a RAID controller card, in addition
to periodic backup creation, is recommended.
■ Notes on Operating Backups
Take the following notes when operating backups.
For details, refer to "PRIMERGY ServerBooks" supplied with the server, and "Supplement" supplied
with options.
288
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● Head Cleaning
Airborne dust and dust from the magnetic media can collect on the head of the magnetic tape device. To
remove this dust, head cleaning must be implemented. Implement head cleaning when the device
displays a cleaning request. Particularly DDS devices require periodic head cleaning, otherwise dust can
cling to the magnetic head, creating a situation that cannot be cleaned with standard head cleaning
methods, and eventually render the device useless.
Also note that the cleaning media has a limit on how many times it can be used. Using cleaning media
that exceeded its lifespan will have no cleaning effect. Note these points especially when performing
automatic backups with library devices.
● Managing Media Lifespans
Media is a consumable product that must be replaced regularly.
Continued use of media exceeding its lifespan can have negative effects on the device (e.g. increase the
speed of dust accumulation). The lifespan of media varies depending on the environment and operation
condition of the device, the type of backup software used, and other operation conditions, however, it is
recommended that they be replaced sooner than later.
To manage the lifespan, write the use start date on the media.
● Rotating Media
When using a single media cartridge over and over, backup data can be temporarily lost in the event the
backup fails. Also if the hard disk fails during backup, the backup data cannot be recovered.
Perform backup operations using multiple mediums on a rotating basis.
● Avoid Leaving Media in Devices
Because the magnetic recording surface of the device is exposed, media can easily affected by airborne
dust when left inserted for a long period of time. Insert the media before using it, and remove the media
after use, and restore it in its case.
Also note that some tape devices write management information to the tape when ejecting the media. If
the power were to go out when the media is still in the device, this writing process will not be performed
and the media may become corrupted.
To avoid this, remove the media from the device when turning off the server/device.
● Verifying Data after a Backup
Some backup software products provide data verification functions after a backup is completed. Such
functions will read and verify the data written to the media after a backup is completed. This will
increase the usage of the media, thus reducing the number of times it can be used for backups.
Depending on the hardware being used, some devices perform "read after write" operations on data; note
the points of this section as necessary.
9
289
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
● Ejecting Media after a Backup
Some backup software products provide functions for ejecting media after a backup is completed. Such
functions will rewind the tape after a backup is completed and then eject the media from the drive.
Be sure to execute this function for autoloader/library devices. Depending on the structure of some
servers, this function may cause the media to eject from an internal device of the server and hit the
chassis door. If this is the case, open the door when ejecting, or do not eject the media.
● Media Label Types and Positions
When writing information such as the name on media, use the label that came with the media.
The area in which a label can be posted on the media of each device varies.
Failing to post labels in the designated area can damage the device.
● Data Storage
When storing data for long periods of time, store the media in a location least affected by humidity and
magnetic fields.
290
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.6 Restoring the System
In the unfortunate event where the system file, system configuration, or environment
changes during startup are corrupted, use the repair information stored on the
recovery disk created at the installation to restore the system.
ꢀ
Create a recovery disk when you have installed an OS or changed the system configuration. Refer to
9.6.1 For Windows Server 2003
● Items Required
•
•
•
•
Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM
Automated System Recovery (ASR) floppy disk (created beforehand)
Backup media (created beforehand)
Driver disk (for RAID cards or onboard SCSI)
Windows Server 2003 First Step Guide
•
1
Follow "Windows Server 2003 First Step Guide" to start Windows Server 2003
setup.
2
3
When a message prompting you to press the [F6] key appears immediately
after the start of setup, press the [F6] key.
When a message prompting you to press the [F2] key appears, press the [F2]
key.
A message prompting you to insert the ASR floppy disk appears.
4
5
6
Insert the ASR floppy disk and follow the window instructions.
The system restarts and a message appears. Press the [F6] key.
Follow the window instructions to restore the system.
9
Notes on Automated System Recovery
Automated System Recovery does not restore data files.
ꢀ
291
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.6.2 For a Windows 2000 Server
● Items Required
•
•
•
Windows 2000 Server CD-ROM
Windows 2000 Server system recovery disk (created beforehand)
Windows 2000 Server First Step Guide
1
Follow "Windows 2000 Server First Step Guide" to start Windows 2000 Server
setup.
2
3
From the [Welcome to Setup] window of the Windows 2000 Server Setup
program, press the [R] key to select restoration.
Follow the message on the setup window to restore the system.
Notes on system restoration
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The system may return to the initial installation conditions depending on the restoration information
used. In this case, the system must be configured after system restoration.
Windows 2000 Server may have to be reinstalled if system files or system information are severely
The message "The file ******.*** is not the original file copied when Windows 2000 was installed."
appears during file restoration. Press the [Enter] or [A] key to restore the file.
292
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.7 Reinstalling the OS
This section explains the procedure for reinstalling the OS.
9.7.1 Checking before OS Reinstallation
■ Removing the Optional Devices
Remove the following optional devices before reinstalling the OS. Install or connect them after OS
installation.
•
•
•
•
Optional SCSI devices (e.g., hard disk cabinet or DAT unit) connected via a SCSI card
Internal hard disk units that do not contain the OS installation folder
5-inch internal devices
USB devices
■ Deletion of Data from the Disc
Reinstalling a disk will delete all the contents of that disk. Please be careful. Save the necessary data and
system configuration in a different location.
Some drivers and software are not installed together with the OS. Install them after OS installation.
■ Other Notes
Other notes are the same as those that apply for first time installation. Please check in advance.
9.7.2 Reinstallation Using ServerStart
When the previous installation was performed in guide or preconfiguration mode, the ServerStart floppy
disk used in that installation can be used again. When the reinstallation is performed with the same
configuration as that for the previous installation, you do not have to edit the configuration file on the
ServerStart floppy disk. You do not have to configure setting on wizards. After ServerStart starts up,
click [Start (OS) Installation] to perform installation.
Use the expert mode when you want to perform reinstallation while maintaining the existing partitions.
9
293
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.8 Changing OS Settings
This section explains the procedure for changing OS settings.
When you have changed to enable Hyper-Threading using the BIOS setting after
starting operation in a one CPU configuration or when you add a CPU, change the
OS to the multi-processor kernel.
When you will reduce the number of CPUs from two to one or disable Hyper-
Threading, change the OS to the uni-processor kernel.
ꢀ
ꢀ
For the use of Linux, refer to the Fujitsu PRIMERGY website (http://primergy.fujitsu.com).
Hyper-Threading is enabled at the time of purchase. For functions and settings of Hyper-Threading,
9.8.1 For Windows Server 2003
After adding a CPU or changing the Hyper-Threading setting, starting up the OS changes OS settings.
A pop-up message appears. Follow the window instructions.
9.8.2 For a Windows 2000 Server
Change OS settings in the following procedure, then add a CPU or change the Hyper-Threading setting.
1
2
Startup Windows 2000 Server.
Start up Device Manager.
1. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
2. Double-click the [System] icon.
3. Select the [Hardware] tab and click [Device Manager (D)...].
3
Display computer properties.
1. Select [Devices (by type)] from the [View] menu.
2. Select [Computer] in the tree view and click [+] to expand it.
3. Double-click the following item.
• [ACPI uni-processor] to change the OS to the multi-processor kernel
• [ACPI multi-processor] to change the OS to the uni-processor kernel
4
5
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver (P)...].
The device driver upgrade wizard starts up.
Click [Next].
294
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
6
In search method selection, select [Display known drivers for this device and
select a driver from the list.] and click [Next].
The [Select Device Driver] window appears.
7
Select [Show all hardware of this device class]. From the [Manufacturers] list,
select [(Standard computer)]. Select the following from [Model].
• [ACPI Multiprocessor PC] to change the OS to the multi-processor kernel
• [ACPI Uniprocessor PC] to change the OS to the uni-processor kernel
ꢀ
If you select an incorrect "model" operations will not be performed normally. Because reinstal-
lation is also sometimes necessary, check that you have selected the correct model.
8
9
Click [Next].
The [Start Device Driver Installation] window appears.
Click [Next].
Driver update starts. The [Finish] window appears when it completes.
10 Click [Finish].
The property screen for the ACPI multi-processor PC or ACPI uni-processor PC appears.
11 Click [Close].
The [Change System Settings] window appears.
9
295
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
12 Click [Yes].
The computer shuts down and restarts automatically.
13 Add an optional CPU or change the Hyper-Threading setting in the BIOS Setup
Utility.
14 Restart the system.
When the OS starts up, check that the item under [Computer] is changed in Device Manager of
Control Panel.
296
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
9.9 Maintenance Service
This section explains the details of the maintenance service.
If the cause of the failure is uncertain or if the original condition cannot be restored,
contact the seller or your maintenance engineer.
9.9.1 Maintenance Service
■ Maintenance Support Period
The maintenance support period is for five years after the purchase of the server.
■ Non-durable Components
Depending on the environment and period of usage there will be non-durable components that require
replacement within the warranty period.
Customers who have signed up to hardware maintenance contract will be provided with replacement
parts free of charge and will have higher priority for replacement. Customers not signed up to hardware
maintenance contract will be charged for operation cost (including the maintenance parts) separately.
Replacing non-durable components
ꢀ
To ensure stable operation of the server system, it is recommended that a maintenance service
agreement be purchased.
ꢀ
Replacement Period for Non-durable Parts
The lifetime of such components is calculated based on appropriate usage environments.
Although the guaranteed range for operation is set between 10 and 35 °C, the lifetime is assumed at a
constant average temperature of 25 degrees.
ꢀ
Types of non-durable components
table: Non-durable Component List
Component
Description
RAID Ctrl 2-Channel
128MB w/ BBU (PG-
142E3) battery
Regardless of the time the power was turned on and off, the lifetime is 3 years.
9
297
Chapter 9 Operation and Maintenance
9.9.2 Contacting Maintenance Support
Before contacting maintenance support, check the following. For the maintenance support, refer to
"Contact Information" in "Start Guide".
● Item
•
Model name and product ID of the server
They are described on the label on the server. For the label location, refer to "Start Guide".
Hardware configuration (Types and locations of internal options)
Configuration information (BIOS Setup Utility, SCSI Setup Utility settings)
OS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LAN/WAN system configuration
Phenomena (what happened when doing what, what was displayed, etc.) and date/time of occurrence
Environmental settings of the server
LED statuses
ꢀ
Print and fill in the Configuration Sheet and the Accident Sheet of the "Configuration Sheets".
298
A Server Specifications
A Server Specifications
This section explains the specifications for the server.
A.1 Diskless Type
table: Server Specifications - Diskless Type
Item
Functions and Specifications
Product ID
PGQT2027A
PGQT2025A
PGQT2023A
PGUT2023A
®
®
64-bit Intel Xeon™
64-bit Intel Xeon™
®
Standard
Processor 3.60E GHz/
2MB
Processor 3.20E GHz/
2MB
64-bit Intel Xeon™ Processor 3.0E GHz/2MB
®
64-bit Intel Xeon™
processor 3.20EHz/2MB
64-bit Intel Xeon™
processor 3.60EGHz/2MB
CPU
modules
With the
conversion kit
–
–
–
®
Number of
multiplication
2
ka
Standard
512MB (256MB DDRI 333 SDRAM-DIMM × 2)
512MB / 1GB / 2GB (DIMM × 2)
6GB (when 1GB DIMM is used)
Memory Adding size
Maximum
VGA chip: ATI Rage XL 640 × 480, 800 × 600, 1024 × 768, 1280 × 1024
Displayed colors: Differ depending on resolution and OS
Graphics
3 bays (including the standard bay)
Types: CD-ROM, DAT72, VXA2, LTO, hard disk unit bay conversion kit
5-inch storage bay
Installed as
standard
24× slim EIDE CD-ROM drive
3.5-inch storage bay
Standard
6 bays (9 bays when the internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit is used)
–
73.4GB / 146.8GB / 300GB (10,000rpm Ultra320 SCSI SCA)
73.4GB (15,000rpm Ultra320 SCSI SCA)
Adding size
Maximum
Disk array
2700GB (300GB × 9)
–
Expansion slots
Standard PCI card
Floppy disk drive
Interface
PCI slots x 5 (64bit/133MHz × 2 / 64bit/100MHz × 2 / 32bit33MHz × 1)
–
3.5-inch (2 mode 1.44MB/720KB) (Standard)
LAN (1Gbit Ethernet) × 1 (Standard), Serial × 2, Parallel × 1 (optional), keyboard, mouse, monitor, USB × 3
Keyboard and Mouse
option
286 × 753 × 474
(When the Rack Conversion kit for TX200 S2 is used:
483 (incl. protruding parts) × 750 (incl. protruding parts) × 177 (4U))
40kg
Dimension (Width ×
Depth × Height (mm))
Weight
Internal clock precision
Power consumption
Power
2–3 minutes/month
Max. 550W (Max. 1980kJ/h)
100VAC (50/60Hz) / bipolar ground type
Standard: 1, Max.: 2
Power supply unit
Fan
Standard: 2, Max.: 4
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Windows 2000 Advanced Server,
OS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (v. 3 for x86)/Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES (v. 3 for x86)
The specifications for this server are liable to be updated without any notice. Please be forewarned.
300
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
A.2 SCSI Type
table: Server Specifications - SCSI Type
Item
Product ID
Standard
Functions and Specifications
PGQT2023G
A
®
64-bit Intel Xeon™ Processor 3.0E GHz/2MB
With the
CPU
–
2
conversion kit
modules
Number of
multiplication
Standard
Memory Adding size
Maximum
512MB (256MB DDRI 333 SDRAM-DIMM × 2)
512MB / 1GB / 2GB (DIMM × 2)
6GB (when 1GB DIMM is used)
VGA chip: ATI Rage XL 640 × 480, 800 × 600, 1024 × 768, 1280 × 1024
Displayed colors: Differ depending on resolution and OS
Graphics
3 bays (including the standard bay)
Types: CD-ROM, DAT72, VXA2, LTO, hard disk unit bay conversion kit
5-inch storage bay
Installed as
standard
24× slim EIDE CD-ROM drive
3.5-inch storage bay
Standard
6 bays (9 bays when the internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit is used)
73.4GB (10,000rpm Ultra320 SCSI SCA) × 1
73.4GB / 146.8GB / 300GB (10,000rpm Ultra320 SCSI SCA)
73.4GB (15,000rpm Ultra320 SCSI SCA)
Adding size
Maximum
Disk array
2700GB (300GB × 9)
–
Expansion slots
Standard PCI card
Floppy disk drive
PCI slots x 5 (64bit/133MHz × 2 / 64bit/100MHz × 2 / 32bit33MHz × 1)
–
3.5-inch (2 mode 1.44MB/720KB) (Standard)
Interface
LAN (1Gbit Ethernet) × 1 (Standard), Serial × 2, Parallel × 1 (optional), keyboard, mouse, monitor, USB × 3
Keyboard and Mouse
option
286 × 753 × 474
(When the Rack Conversion kit for TX200 S2 is used:
483 (incl. protruding parts) × 750 (incl. protruding parts) × 177 (4U))
40kg
Dimension (Width ×
Depth × Height (mm))
Weight
Internal clock precision
Power consumption
Power
2–3 minutes/month
Max. 550W (Max. 1980kJ/h)
100VAC (50/60Hz) / bipolar ground type
Standard: 1, Max.: 2
Power supply unit
Fan
Standard: 2, Max.: 4
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Windows 2000 Advanced Server,
OS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (v. 3 for x86)/Red Hat Enterprise Linux ES (v. 3 for x86)
The specifications for this server are liable to be updated without any notice. Please be forewarned.
301
B Specifications for Hardware Options
B Specifications for Hardware
Options
This section explains the specifications for hardware options for the server.
When you have bought a hardware option as a standard option, check that the
package contains the following items before use. Should it happen that items are
missing, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your sales
representative or maintenance engineer.
B.1 CPU
■ Package
•
•
•
•
CPU (1)
Heat sink (1)
CPU fan (1)
"Cautions for Handling" (1)
■ Specifications
table: CPU Specifications
Model
PG-FG232
PG-FG233
PG-FG234
Clock frequency
3E GHz
3.20E GHz
2MB
3.60E GHz
Internal secondary cache size
B.2 Memory
■ Package
•
RAM modules (2)
■ Specifications
table: Memory Specifications
Model
Capacity
PG-RM51AE
PG-RM1AE
PG-RM2AE
2GB
512MB
1GB
333MHz (Dual edge)
184PIN
Clock frequency
PIN count
302
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
B.3 Internal Hard Disk Units
■ Package
A
•
Hard disk unit (1)
■ Specifications
table: Internal Hard Disk Unit Specifications
Model
Interface
PG-HDH71K
PG-HDH41K
Ultra320 SCSI
3.5-inch hard disk
146.8GB 300GB
PG-HDH31K
PG-HDH75K
Storage media
Memory capacity *1
73.4GB
73.4GB
Maximum data transfer
speed
320MB/s (Ultra320 Wide)
Average latency speed
Rpm
2.99ms
0.75kg
3.00ms
2.00ms
10,000rpm
15,000rpm
Dimension
101.6 × 146.0 × 25.4 (mm)
Weight *2
0.73kg
0.8kg
*1:The value indicates memory capacity of the formatted hard disk (1GB = 10003 bytes).
*2:A Hot plug carrier is not included.
B.4 Internal Hard Disk Unit Bay Conversion Kit
■ Package
•
•
•
Internal hard disk unit bay conversion kit (1)
SCSI cable (1)
"Cautions for Handling" (1)
■ Specifications
table: Internal Hard Disk Unit Bay Conversion Kit Specifications
Model
PG-BC102
3 units
Number of installable internal hard disk units
Dimension (W × D × H)
Weight
149 × 191 × 86 (mm)
1.1kg
303
B Specifications for Hardware Options
B.5 Power Cord Selection
The power cord for this unit has been packed separately and has been selected according to the country
of destination. It must be used to prevent electric shock. Use the following guidelines if it is necessary to
replace the original cord set.
The female receptacle of the cord set must meet CEE-22 requirements (see Figure).
■ For the United States and Canada
Use a UL listed and CSA labeled cord set consisting of a three conductor cord with a maximum length
of 15 feet.
For units which stand on a desk or table, type SVT or SJT cord sets should be used.
For units which stand on the floor, only SJT type cord sets should be used.
The cord set must be selected according to the current rating for your unit.
Please consult the table below for the selection criteria for power cords used in the United States and
Canada.
table: Selection Criteria for Power Cords Used in the United States and Canada
Cord Type
Size of Conductors in Cord
Maximum Current Rating of Unit
SJT
18 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
10 Amps
12 Amps
12 Amps
SVT
18 AWG
17 AWG
10 Amps
12 Amps
• Parallel
For units set at 115 V:
• Tandem
For units set at 230 V:
use a parallel blade, grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 125 V.
use a tandem blade, grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V.
304
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● For units set at 230 V (outside of the United States and Canada):
Use a cord set consisting of a minimum AWG according to the table above and a grounding type
attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the
country in which the equipment will be installed and should be marked HAR.
A
■ For the United Kingdom
Should the plug on the flexible cord not be of the type for your socket outlets, do not use an adapter but
remove the plug from the cord and discard. Carefully prepare the end of the supply cord and fit a suitable
plug.
• This appliance must be earthed.
ꢀ
The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
As the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
•
•
•
The wire which is colored Green and Yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or colored Green or Green and Yellow.
The wire which is colored Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N
or colored Black.
The wire which is colored Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L
or colored Red.
305
C Using the Server Management Port
C Using the Server Management
Port
This server supports the remote control function.
When a personal computer (PC) is connected to the server management port of this
server with an RS-232C cross cable, the PC can be used to control (turn on/off and
reset) the server power supply.
To enable the remote control function, perform the following procedure.
•
•
•
Configuring the Server Management Port
Connecting the Server to a PC
Configuring terminal software communication settings on the PC
C.1 Configuring the Server Management Port
Serial port 1 on the server is used as the server management port. In the BIOS Setup Utility, specify
Serial port 1 as the server management port.
ꢀ
When the server management port is specified, Serial port 2 becomes the only serial port the OS can
recognize.
1
Turn on the server. Press the [F2] key during POST to start up the BIOS Setup
Utility.
2
Select the [Main] menu → the [Peripheral Configuration] submenu. Set the
following items.
• Set [Serial1] to [Disabled].
• Set [Serial Multiplexer] to [BMC].
3
From the [Exit] menu, select [Saving Changes & Exit] to exit the BIOS Setup
Utility.
306
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
C.2 Connecting the Server to a PC
Connect the server to a PC using an RS-232C cross cable.
[Server - Rear]
A
RS-232C cross cable
1
Server management port
[PC - Rear]
Serial port
C.3 Configuring the Terminal Software (PC)
Perform the settings to enable use of the remote control function using terminal software on the PC.
■ Port Configuration
Configure the port on the PC as follows:
table: Port Settings
Item
Contents
Bits/sec.
Data bit
Parity
9600
8
Not applied
1
Stop bit
Flow control
Not applied
307
C Using the Server Management Port
(Window example)
C.4 Remote Power Supply Control
The server power supply can be remote-controlled with the terminal software on the PC.
The menus to be displayed differ depending on whether the server is on or off.
■ Starting Up the Remote Controller
1
2
Start up the terminal software.
When "Login:" appears, enter "Remote" and press the [Enter] key.
Note that "Remote" is case-sensitive.
3
4
When "Password:" appears, enter "Remote" and press the [Enter] key.
Note that "Remote" is case-sensitive. As shown below, the characters you have entered are
displayed as asterisks.
Password: ******
ꢀ
When "Main>" appears, enter "q" and press the [Enter] key. "Login:" will appear.
The remote control window appears.
The window to be displayed differs depending on whether the server is on or off.
308
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
● When the server is on
The following window appears. The server can be reset, restarted, or turned off.
******************************************
Welcome to System TX200S2
A
BMC FW: 0n.nn
SDRR: nn.nn
State: On (na = Currently not available)
******************************************
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MENU
(1) Immediate Power Down
(2) Immediate Reset
(3) Graceful Power Down
(4) Power Cycle
na Power On
(6) View System Eventlog (SEL)
Enter selection or (0) to quit:
table: Remote Operations Available When the Server is On
Key
[1]
Menu name
Immediate Power Down
Immediate Reset
Operation
Turns the server off.
Resets the server.
[2]
Graceful Power Down
Shuts down the OS and turns the server off. Available only
when ServerView is installed.
[3]
Power Cycle
Turns the server off and back on again.
Refers to the system event log of the server.
Exits the remote controller.
[4]
[6]
[0]
View System Eventlog(SEL)
-
309
C Using the Server Management Port
● When the server is off
The following window appears. The server can be turned on.
******************************************
Welcome to System TX200 S2
BMC FW: 0n.nn
SDRR: nn.nn
State: On (na = Currently not available)
******************************************
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MENU
na Immediate Power Down
na Immediate Reset
na Graceful Power Down
na Power Cycle
(5) Power On
(6) View System Eventlog (SEL)
Enter selection or (0) to quit:
table: Remote Operations Available When the Server is Off
Menu name Operation
Key
[5]
Power On
Turn the server on.
View System Eventlog(SEL)
-
Refers to the system event log of the server.
Exits the remote controller.
[6]
[0]
310
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
D Recycling
This section explains how to recycle this server.
A
■ Disposing of the Server
When scrapping this server, refer to "Contact Information" in "Start Guide", and contact your sales
representative or maintenance engineer. This server must be disposed of as industrial waste.
Furthermore, if the server is disposed of as it is, someone else may gain access to the information
contained on the hard disks. It is therefore recommended that all drives be formatted before disposal.
However, just formatting or deleting files may not avoid the risk that the data is restored and used for
wrongful purposes. If confidential or private information is saved, in order to make it impossible to be
restored, it is recommended to use third-party data wiping tools.
■ Disposing of Used-up Batteries
Used-up batteries must be disposed of as industrial waste and therefore require special processing. Let a
licensed industrial waste disposal company take care of disposing them.
■ Disposing of Liquid Crystal Displays
Liquid crystal displays must be disposed of as industrial waste and therefore require special processing.
Let a licensed industrial waste disposal company take care of disposing them.
311
D Recycling
312
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
Index
Configuration file
A
Close/save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Open/create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Configuring a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Configuring RAID
Corrective actions against event logs . . . . .277
Creating a DOS Floppy Disk. . . . . . . . . . . .148
Creating a System Recovery Disk
Application wizard
B
Advanced System Configuration Submenu
Creating the Automated System Recovery
D
Deleting logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Deleting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Disk Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Drive cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Drive Letter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Driver types
E
External SCSI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
F
C
G
Guided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
H
Hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
How to install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
313
How to Create Driver Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Multi-processor kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
I
If memory dump cannot be collected . . . . . 277
Installable expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installation (on multiple servers). . . . . . . . . 108
Guided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Preconfiguration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Installation Partition Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installing
N
Notes on a multiple LAN adapter configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adapter numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Notes on UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
O
ServerView. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Installing a CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing a CPU an expansion card . . . . . . 195
Installing a CPU internal devices . . . . . . . . 214
5-inch bays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Installing a CPU internal hard disk units . . . 205
Installing a CPU memory modules . . . . . . . 189
Installing the LAN Driver
Error window after installation. . . . . . . . 276
Intel® PROSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Internal Hard Disk Unit Bay Configuration Kit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Internal Hard Disk Unit Specifications. . . . . 303
Onboard LAN Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . 157
Open the Rack Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
OS installation wizard
Guided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
P
Paging File Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Windows 2000 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Password settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Precautions on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Preconfiguration mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
R
RAID wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Reinstalling the OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Configuring a remote floppy . . . . . . . . . 104
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Preparation of remote resources . . . . . 100
Preparation of the PXE server . . . . . . . . 93
PXE server requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Remote resource server requirements . . 92
Starting installation (for a PXE server) . 101
Starting installation (for a remote resource
L
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Manual installation
Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Memory Dump File Setting
For Windows Server 2000 . . . . . . . . . . 292
For Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . 291
314
PRIMERGY TX200 S2 User’s Guide
S
Settings Required Before Operating the Server
T
U
W
315
316
PRIMERGY TX200 S2
User's Guide
B7FH-3021-03EN-00
Issued on July, 2005
Issued by FUJITSU LIMITED
• The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
• Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights
arising from the use of any information in this manual.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any without the prior written
permission of Fujitsu.
|